Home

MODBUS(R)/TCP Interface Module User`s Manual

Contents

1. Used by the master for matching of the response Transaction ID 2 bytes message from the slave Indicates the protocol of the PDU protocol data Protocol ID 2 bytes unit MBAP header oe Stores 0 in the case of MODBUS TCP MODBUS application header Stores the message size in byte unit Message length The message length after this field is stored See the above figure Used to specify the slave connected to the other Module ID 1 byte line e g MODBUS serial protocol The master specifies the processing to be performed Function code 1 byte for the slave PDU When master sends request message to slave Protocol data unit Stores the requested processing Data 1 to 252 bytes When slave sends response message to master Stores the result of processing execution 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 PDU Formats by Functions This section explains the PDU protocol data unit formats of the MODBUS standard functions 1 Precautions for specifying device number in message When specifying a device number in a message specify device number 1 However it does not apply to the file number and device number specified for Read Write file record Example When the status of input 32 100032 is read with Read discrete inputs FC 02 Function code Head input number Read points Function code 02H 001FH 0001H Specify 31 001Fx for the head input number to read the
2. a anaE er RRt 5 12 5 5 Router Relay F nction iecit ect tea ee Wada ena dia Hoa en ua ee Toa den ua det odo dead ue dea due d 5 14 5 6 GX Developer Connection Function enne ae a aa eia iaaa 5 15 6 1 Handling Precautions sssssssssseeseeeeeeeeeenen nennen nnne nennen nre tnnt nnne e aie 6 1 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Setting sse 6 2 6 3 Part Names 2 n Rad RE Pe E PH E e OD eH P P E P f 6 4 6 4 Connection to Ethemet 2 3 3 GB ep bei bier bie edu bi ep ES 6 6 6 5 Unit Tests uxo ce Up eU n e d Ue dte e Lu d eee d e te a c e 6 8 6 5 1 Hardware test E 6 8 6 5 2 Self loopback test ee tee eine ge eel agen eda ge due da eee 6 9 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting sseeeeenennenenen emen 6 10 6 6 1 Communication starting conditions depending on basic parameter MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method setting 6 16 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure ssssssssssssseeeeeeeenennen emen rens 7 1 7 2 B sic Paratmieltersz ii nene en ee etie ee eH p e e ei ons 7 6 7 2 1 Basic parameters details sess eene nennen nennen 7 6 2 2 TCP UDP IP setting accorto repre tr OE Pe ERR p RE YR SERERE dp gules RR PE HE E REIR spen 7 8 7 2 3 GX Developer connection information setting esseeeneneennennenen 7 16 p2o4MODBUSCITCP Seti estime c
3. 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q c When the basic parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters Intelligent function module switch setting lt Switch 2 gt bi bO MODBUS device assignment parameter Basic parameter starting method starting method 0 Start with the default parameters 1 Start with the user set parameters Communication starting conditions Default parameter setting QJ71MT91 operation Basicparameters Module READY X0 Basic parameter setting request Y1 Basic parameter setting normally completed Basic parameter X3 H Power ee X1 2 Bs i a existence OFF Oo then amp MODBUS device ON i MODBUS device 9 p dde Rd Y8 Pro assignment 3 PEMA eques gram parameter creation MODBUS device mable rar S assignment parameter xg control i QO setting normally ler completed CPU MODBUS device reset assignment parameter XA T setting existence Automatic communication Not started Started S function Masterfunction ss eter eee A renee i E f pe MW a oe ote ece es g Dedicated insiruction i Not executable Executable g Masterfunction eeesecmm m Re o c te
4. E IE E Remaining area is ignored 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 4 MODBUS Device Assignment Parameters MELSEC Q Using MODBUS device assignment parameters the MODBUS devices are correlated with the programmable controller CPU device memory This allows direct access from the MODBUS compatible master device to the programmable controller CPU device memory Programmable controller CPU i Sequence program unnecessary i Device memory Device memory D299 D300 D301 QJ71MT91 Slave function MODBUS device assignment parameters MODBUS device 400499 400500 400501 Request message holding register 400500 read request Response message holding register 400500 1234u MODBUS TCP master device 7 PARAMETER SETTING Mo M1201 M4700 M8191 YO Y1FFF L4 Programmable controller CPU device MELSEC Q Schematic image of MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Internal relay M so Output Y 8192 Latch relay L 5 d MODBUS device L8191 Special register SD SDO Ew EN SD2047 Data register D DO D999 D6000 fem D12287 t e LL 7 24 Coil 000001 parameter setting example d MODBUSS device assignment 003500 004000 Coil assignment 1 Device code Head device
5. Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh OOOO OJ71MT31 EYEE Unavailable rra ee RR Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Explanation of items 1 Activation of other screens MELSEC Q Following screens can be displayed from the intelligent function module utility screen a Initial setting screen Start I O No Module type Module model name gt Initial setting b Auto refresh setting screen Start I O No Module type Module model name gt Auto refresh c Select monitor test module screen Online Monitor Test 41 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal 2 Command buttons module Exit Closes this screen Delete Deletes the initial setting and auto refresh setting of the selected 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Intelligent function module utility C Pee eels Online Toc Open parameters Cleo Close parameters Save parameters Cres Delete parameters Wk ent function module utility C MELSEC G anction module parameter ESTE Tools Help Monitor Test Read from PLC tl 0 No Modi write to PLC Anan r it function module paramete MELSEC Q a File menu Intelligent function module parameters of the project opened by GX Developer are handled Open parameters Reads a pa
6. Stop moritor Details Decimal input Monitoring Setting range 2 60 Executetest Refer to Section 8 6 6 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 1 X Y Monitor test Monitor Test Purpose Monitor I O signals and performs tests on output signals Operating procedure Monitor Test screen X Y Monitor test Monitor Test Screen X Y Monitor test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value XD Module READY XU1 Basic parameter setting normally completed X02 Basic parameter setting error completed X03 Basic parameter setting existence X04 amp utomatic communication parameter setting normally completed XD5 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed gt lt 06 Automatic communication operation status lt 07 Automatic communication error status 808 MODBUS R device assignment parameter Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Cannot execute test Make teat file Stop monitor a est Items X Input signals iad Monitor Test Item address section xoo modue READY ooo X01 Basic parameter setting normally completed X02 Basic parameter setting error completed X03 Basic parameter setting existence
7. sssssssss 9 4 Setting precautions ssssss 9 6 Timing charts for setting 9 5 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area s in 11 15 Automatic communication parameters 7 19 Automatic response function 5 10 Index 1 B D Basic parameter setting 9 1 I O signals for setting 9 1 Setting method sss 9 1 Setting precautions sessssss 9 3 Timing charts for setting 9 2 Basic parameters sssssssssssss 7 6 Basic parameter error code storage area Narduitarsiea Dares actuate discri eic UE 11 15 Basic parameter screen 8 30 Basic parameter starting method 6 12 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter status ssssssessssss 8 23 Buffer memory sssssseee 3 5 Buffer memory addresses used for PING lOSL castor etin ad ees ideas 11 44 eror erc EN 7 25 Coil assignment 1 sss 7 26 COM ERR LED turn off ssse 11 40 Common utility package operations 8 6 Communication condition setting 6 12 Communication status sss 8 27 Connection precautions ssss 6 6
8. A QJ71MT91 App 6 App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Connection setup window Transfer Setup PC side I F ey RE ed CCIECont NET CClink V Ethemet AF NET 10 H board board board board board PLC side I F CCIE Cont MNET II CC Link Ethernet NET 10 H module module module module module Network No 1 Station No 1 Computer type QU71E71 IP address Host 0 0 0 0 Routing parameter transfer method Automatic transfer method Other z Connection channel list station prne PLC direct coupled setting Connection test Network route PLC type C24 CCIE Cont NETII NET 10 H Detail Multiple CPU setting Network No 1 Station No n 3 3 J 3 System image 1 23 4 Line Connected Q A6TEL C24 C24 CCIE Cont NET I CCLink Ethernet BETA Target PLC Accessing other station T ERCETER a PC side I F 1 Select Ethernet board and double click it to display the PC side I F Ethernet board setting screen 2 Set Protocol on the PC side I F Ethernet board setting screen e Protocol e Select TCP or UDP 3 Since Network No and Station No are not used leave them as displayed on the screen PC side I F Ethernet board setting Network No 1 Station No 1 Cancel This is the layout setting layout for the Ethernet board Please execute the following setting Network No Network No of Ethernet unit set in parameter
9. MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting result storage area Error device type Switch 3 4 Local station IP address setting status 192 1 0 254 Eror assigned group No Module READY JAccessible Flash ROM setting Make text file Stop monitor Details Cannot execute test XIY Monitor test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module modelname QJ71MTS1 Monitoring Flash ROM setting Curent value display Make testfile Stop moritor Start 1 0 No 0000 X Y Monitor test Refer to Section 8 6 2 Automatic communication status Module information Module type MODBLIS R Module Module model name QJ71MT91 Start Details Cannot execute test Monitoring Basic MODBUS R device 0 No 0000 Setting item Current value 00 Module READY Accessible Setting value Setting item Current value Automatic communication operation status Stepped Setting value XUT Basic parameter setting normally completed OFF X02 Basic parameter setting error completed OFF Automatic communication parameter error code storage area 403 Basic parameter setting existence Parameters set XD4 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed OFF Automatic communicatio
10. Stop monitor Details Monitoring Select input Setting range Not requested Being requested Execute test 8 Confirm the PING test execution request current value The PING test execution request current value must be as shown below PING test execution request current value Not requested PING test completed current value OFF PING test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Communication time check Current value Setting value Transmission count IP address PING test execution request PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting display Current value Make text file Stop monitor Details Monitoring Select input Setting range Not requested Being requested MELSEC Q 7 Change the PING test execution request current value back to Not requested Because the PING test execution request current value does not automatically return to Not requested on completion of the PING test it must be manually changed to Not requested after the PING test is completed Select Not requested in the PING test execution request setting field and click the Execute test button When the processing is completed a Completed messag
11. Turns OFF Automatic Automatic communication parameter setting comm n 1 parameter request automatic communication setting start request Y1004 when setting normally is completed normally completed SET 200 J Turns ON MODBUS device a assignment parameter setting setting ommend command M200 X1005 Turns OFF Automatic RST 1004 communication parameter setting Automatic request automatic communication comm paramelar start request Y1004 and stores setting error code and parameter setting error result when setting fails completed ZP REMFR J KI KI HO K3089 D3089 K2 M111 REMFR instruction completion WO a et ee Oe ME Y 1 M111 M112 Take corrective action for error completion referringtoQ 1 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference I Handling of ZP REMFR REMFR REMFR Manual Remote O Network instruction error instruction instruction a ee a OT d completion result 9 PROGRAMMING lt lt MODBUS device assignment parameter setting gt gt M200 X1000 X1003 FMOVP HO Parameter Module Basic setting READY parameter command setting existence D2304 H100 For holding register assignment 1 pm e n co MOVP HOFO00 D2496 HOFF Y D2305 J D2306 Y D2307 J D2432 J D2433 1 D4M D2435 1 MOVP H5500 D2497 i i WovP KO 02498 1 1 MOVP K1024 D2499 RST M200 Paramete
12. ovp 63089 D9002 UO E WovP 63090 D9003 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q lt lt MODBUS device assignment parameter setting gt gt M2 x0 X3 UO tre StS Kove Hm 62304 HOFF Initializes MODBUS device Parameter Module Basic assignment parameter setting setting READY parameter command setting alea existence For coil assignment 1 7777777777777777 C ie et MoVP Hob 82304 Device code 1 1 UO E WovP H100 62305 Head device number i i UON i s i 62306 Head coil number D 1 Ux i MP K512 82307 Assignment points For input register assignment 1 T E H MOVP HOA8 G2432 Device code 1 Li UON wovP K3500 62433 J Head device number 1 i Uo E i WOVP K3490 82434 Head input register number i 1 Uo wovP K5500 02435 4 Assignment points M s de d dd Qa Od SWR A l0llsccl esl 5l4 3 For holding register assignment 1 UO i MOVP HOFO00 G2496 1 Device code 4 1 i Uo E M jw H5500 82497 Head device number 1 1 Uo 3 t wovP KO 82498 J Head holding register number 1 1 UX wove ko 8249 J Assignment points i CETELE TES TEE ROPE Be PA NTE a E E E SAE dui E Mop up d er E E 1 _ Turns ON MODBUS device LSET Y8 J assignment parameter setting request Y8 Turns OFF MODBUS device est M H Parameter setting command assignment parameter setting command Turns
13. 5 FUNCTIONS 5 4 KeepAlive Function 1 2 MELSEC Q KeepAlive function When communication with the target device whose TCP connection is open is not made for a predetermined period of time a KeepAlive ACK message is sent from the QJ71MT91 to the target device The alive status of the target device can be checked by whether a response message is returned or not to that ACK message 1 1 The connection may be disconnected if the target device does not support the TCP KeepAlive function unable to respond to the KeepAlive ACK message To use KeepAlive function To use the KeepAlive function set the KeepAlive of the basic parameter to Used Default Used The following basic parameters are available for the KeepAlive function KeepAlive start timer value KeepAlive interval timer value KeepAlive resend count Change the default values set to the basic parameters as necessary Refer to Section 7 2 for details of the basic parameters Operation of KeepAlive function a The QJ71MT91 starts the KeepAlive start timer when it receives the last message from the target device whose TCP connection is open b The QJ71MT91 sends the KeepAlive message for alive check to the target device and starts the KeepAlive interval timer when the KeepAlive start timer expires c The QJ71MT91 resends the KeepAlive message for alive check to the target device when ACK is not returned from the target device and the KeepAliv
14. Target MODBUS device head number i 1 UO IM wwP K10244 650 Access points Automatic communication 1 DE vM E a parameter 2 I DMovP H0C0010002 6524 Jj Target station IP address i lt Write holding registers gt Uo MVP K255 6526 7 Module ID i UON O KO 6527 Repeat interval timer value UO m ANN tov K60 6528 Response monitoring timer value Uo l WovP H5 6529 Type specification of the target i i MODBUS device i UON E M wwP BADO 8533 Head buffer memory address i i UON devi i Write setting T MOVP KO 0534 1 Target MODBUS device head i 7 number 1 UOX n i l MOVP K100 6535 Access points i Turns ON Automatic SET Y4 communication parameter setting request automatic communication _ start request Y4 RST Nt J Turns OFF automatic Pane communication parameter end setting command i rRST YA 4 Turns OFF Automatic mum S communication parameter setting comm request automatic communication parameter start request Y4 when setting is normally completed normally completed rset Turns ON MODBUS 8 device P assignment parameter setting arameter setting command command x5 Turns OFF Automatic RST Y4 1 communication parameter setting Automatic request automatic communication comm start request Y4 and stores error parameter i setting code and parameter setting result error when setting fails completed UOX I M
15. 2 Parameter setting details a Basic parameters Refer to Section 9 2 1 2 a for the basic parameter setting details b Automatic communication parameters Refer to Section 9 2 1 2 b for the automatic communication parameter setting details c MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 9 2 1 2 c for the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting details 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Devices used in program Application X1000 Module READY X1001 Basic parameter setting normally completed X1002 Basic parameter setting error completed X1003 Basic parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed Y1001 Basic parameter setting request Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic QJ71MT91 input output Output Y1004 NS communication start request Y1008 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request External input command Parameter setting command Y40 Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error External output A SEES E ym Automatic communication parameter 2 communication error DO to D19 D48 D272 to D273 D276 to D279 D512 to D520 D524 to D529 Automatic communication parameter setting area D533 to D535 D2304 to D2307 D2432 to D2435 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area D2496 to D2499 D3088 Basic parameter erro
16. 4 STOP the programmable controller CPU Disconnect the network cable from the QJ71MT91 In the intelligent function module switch setting of GX 2 Developer set Switch 1 to OOOEd to select the self loopback test mode Refer to Section 6 6 Reset the programmable controller CPU Test start om 5 seconds check the status of each em ieal odes Ems o e When the self loopback test is completed change the operation mode to Online or another mode in the intelligent function module switch setting 6 Reset the programmable controllercpu Q9 0N C OFF A possible cause of error is the hardware fault of the QJ71MT91 When an error occurs the error code is stored into the error log area address CFEu to CFF of the buffer memory in the QJ71MT91 Using GX Developer confirm the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 11 2 and 11 3 When the self loopback test results in an error run the test again If the error occurs again its possible cause is the hardware fault of the QJ71MT91 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Model name Setting purpose Set the operation mode communication condition and IP address Starting procedure for intelligent function module switch setting screen 1 Start GX Developer 2 Double click Parameter
17. User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup 4 Automatic communication function For a program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt in 5 The automatic communication error code can be monitored on the Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB 9 PROGRAMMING 5 Program example lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt xo X6 D4092 0 E ppp w Module Automatic READY communication operation status NI M401 vind cct nad au ci pto dini ducc M aco erar nd 1 5 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 1 d MCR lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 2 gt gt xo X6 D4092 1 1 1 M NC N2 Module Automatic READY communication operation status N2 M402 Be C XU atre Vp t UIS A TM ERAS I 1 r Program for normal automatic communication parameter 2 1 MCR lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt xo X6 XT UON l BWOV 63104 D4000 Module Automatic Automatic READY comm comm operation error status status D4000 0 H SET vov D4008 D4000 1 ST D4009 gy 7 fF Automatic comm error status RST D4092 0 if RST XI pope A met
18. puce after a little while Rely ateraittewhie after a little while Lt 2 3 4 5 Connection The connection not open was 7454H COM ERR Retry after a little while being closed used to send data TCP receive data size error TCP ULP time out error TCP connection forcibly disconnected TCP connection forcibly disconnected TCP protocol error UDP receive data size error 11 38 The message greater than the TCP maximum size was received As the TCP ULP timer timed out the TCP connection was forcibly disconnected from the local station The TCP connection was disconnected forcibly from the target device This error may be ignored when no problems arise from this error The TCP connection was closed forcibly from the local station The local station uses 64 or more TCP connections Hence the TCP connection was closed forcibly to maintain the TCP connections available for simultaneous opening under frequently opened and closed conditions This error may be ignored when no problems arise from this error As a TCP protocol error was detected the TCP connection was closed forcibly The message greater than the UDP maximum size was received COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operatio
19. ssssssss 7 28 Head holding register number 7 28 Head input number eeeesssesse 7 28 Head input register number 7 28 Head MODBUS device number 7 28 Holding register ssesesess 7 25 Holding register assignment 1 7 26 IK L l O signals a25 isin oed ende 3 3 Indications of indicator LEDs 6 5 Initial Setting aint 8 13 INPUl scat eee ae 7 25 Input assignment 1 assesseer 7 26 IniputFeglster 22 08 testi ate bed he bt tee 7 25 Input register assignment 1 7 26 Intelligent function module parameters 8 8 Intelligent function module switch setting 6 10 Intelligent function module switch setting TEINS conocen ette 6 11 Starting procedure for intelligent function module switch setting screen 6 10 IP address setting sssssssss 6 14 IP reassembly timer value 7 8 KeepAlive function 5 12 7 11 KeepAlive interval timer value 7 11 KeepAlive resend count 7 11 KeepAlive start timer value 7 11 Operation of KeepAlive function 5 12 To use KeepAlive function 5 12 LED VOOM E 6 5 COM ERR 1 2 no deoeede ene 6 5 ERR aii
20. x2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 3 5 Write single coil FC 05 MELSEC Q Writes a value ON OFF to one coil Number of accessible devices with one message 1 point 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code 054 Coil number ON OFF specification 00001 to FFFFx 00004 OFF FFOOn ON H L H 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code 85H Exception code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 6 Write single register FC 06 Writes a value to one holding register Number of accessible devices with one message 1 point 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Holding register number Write data 064 00001 to FFFFx 0000s to FFFFx H L H L 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the re
21. 7 20 Router information Router IP address 7 15 Router information Subnet address 7 13 Router relay function 5 14 7 12 To use router relay function 5 14 Routing information ssssss 7 12 S Self loopback test 6 9 Send frame specification 6 12 Set values of default assignment parameters udine duties ei un d lice i oe 7 30 Slave function ssssssssssssss 5 1 Slave function performance App 5 Software packages sess 2 2 Software version sss 2 9 Split reception monitoring timer value 7 9 Starting the Intelligent function module utility EE 8 11 Subnet mask pattern ssusss 7 12 SWiteh A satt tette 6 11 SWICK ecoute outer 6 12 Switch 3 ee 6 14 SWIN Aeaeeia ct etes 6 14 SWIICIID aciei Diii 6 15 System configuration 2 1 2 6 T Target MODBUS device head number 7 21 Target station IP address 7 20 TCP end timer value ssssss 7 8 TCP resend timer value 7 8 TCP ULP timer value ssss 7 8 TCP zero window timer value 7 8 TCP UDP IP monitoring timer 7 8 TCP UDP IP setting
22. QJ71MT91 responds slowly Normal communication is replacement of QJ71MT91 or target device 11 11 When accessing the programmable controller CPU device in the slave function check if access to the programmable controller CPU from the other modules and sequence program is too often Check for any TCP connection disconnected automatically by the KeepAlive function Check if the number of TCP connections connected simultaneously is within 64 Check if the power was reapplied after replacement of the QJ71MT91 or target Reduce the programmable controller CPU loads Check that the target device is operating normally Section 5 4 Adjust the KeepAlive start timer value Section 7 2 and KeepAlive interval timer value TCP connections may fail temporarily Retry the connection TCP connections with the nodes not specified as preferred ones may be closed automatically when the Section 7 2 connection resources become insufficient Reconnect and retry Specify the nodes as preferred ones when necessary Reapply the power of the QJ71MT91 or target device When the target device has the Ethernet address of the communication target continued communication may be disabled since the Ethernet address changed due to the replacement of the QJ71MT91 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 Confirming QJ71MT91 Status 11 12 This section explains how to confirm the QJ71MT91 status Method Reference
23. 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed with an error the completion status indication device D2 1 turns ON and the error code is stored into the complete condition S1 1 According to the error code check the error and take corrective action referring to the following manual lt Error code gt 03E8H to 4FFFH QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7300H or more Section 11 3 3 in this manual 2 If Basic parameter setting request Y1 turns ON during execution of the MBREO instruction the dedicated instruction is completed with an error 1 In the case of the MBREQ instruction exception codes and function codes are not stored in the Error log address OCFEH to ODFF of the buffer memory Check the exception and function codes by the response message that is stored in the response message storage device 2 This instruction is completed normally even if the target slave device gives an exception response When the instruction is completed normally check the highest order bit of the function code in the response message to determine whether the response is normal or not For an exception response the highest order bit in the first byte of the receive data turns ON For an exception response check the exception code the second byte of the receive data in the response message and take corrective action Refer to Section 11 3 2 Program example The following program is designed t
24. MODBUS device Device used for communication using the MODBUS protocol Programming system devised to make a contact type sequence compatible with the Sequence program programmable controller language as is Draw two vertical control buses and describe contacts etc between the buses to perform programming Memory provided for the programmable controller CPU to record the data handled in sequence program operation Device memory PRODUCT CONFIGURATION The following indicates the product configuration of the QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module Model Item name Quantity QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module SW1D5C QMBU E GX Configurator MB Version 1 1 license product CD ROM SW1D5C QMBU EA GX Configurator MB Version 1 Multiple license product CD ROM 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual explains the specifications functions programming troubleshooting etc of the MELSEC Q series QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module hereafter abbreviated to the QJ71MT91 The QJ71MT91 is used to connect the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to a MODBUS TCP network 1 1 Features 1 Supporting master function of MODBUS TCP communication The QJ71MT91 supports the master function of MODBUS TCP communication which is an open network system for factory automation and it is compatible with various MODBUS TCP slave devices hereafter abbreviated to the slaves
25. N31 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMTO Manual Remote I O Network l instruction a ae a a J result M40 JH vovP K10 D276 Parameter setting command DNOVP H0C0010002 D277 ow x2 D279 7F REMTO UT K1 Ki HO K276 D276 K4 M50 REMTO instruction M50 N51 completion Ah SET Y1001 REMTO REMTO instruction instruction completion result ake corrective action for error compietion reterring to M51 ak tive action f leti ferring to Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMTO l Manual Remote I O Network l instruction AGES MAIS EENE A ERE E ee eee result X1001 RST Y1001 Basic parameter setting normally completed SET M100 Parameter setting command X1002 RST 1001 Basic parameter setting error completed ZP REMFR T KI KI Ho K3088 D3088 Kl M60 REMFR instruction completion Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q M60 M61 a Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMFR REMFR Manual Remote I O Network MELSEC Q Local slave station port No Target slave port No for automatic communication function Transfers basic parameters to QJ71MT91 buffer memory Turns ON Basic parameter setting command M400 when ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error CPU response monitoring timer value Preferred node specification 1 IP address Preferred node specifica
26. Parameter creation Module READY xo Cre Basic parameter OFF setting existence x3 MODBUS device OFF assignment Y8 parameter setting request MODBUS device assignment x8 parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device OFF au OFF assignment X9 t L parameter setting f error completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignment parameter error code 0C13 storage area Error code and setting result clear MODBUS device eee ung OC14 to OC15s resultstoragearea ne gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b When setting is completed with an error n MODBUS device MODBUSP device assignment parameter assignment parameter 1 setting error H setting normally i completed i completed MODBUS device assignment parameter correction MODBUS device assignment parameter creation error Parameter creation Module READY X0 DEF Basic parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignmen Y8 parameter setting request MODBUS device assignmen x8 parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignmen parameter setting error completed MODBUS device assignmen parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignmen 0C13u parameter error code storage area Error code
27. Stat End Dev name Points Stat iB 58 ooo Olr sB X S512 ooo e eS ee ee NENNT nn ae e Transfer2 lY v Transfers Transe Transfer Transfers 4 Refresh setting For the processing equivalent to auto refresh setting GX Configurator MB refer to Refresh processing in 6 b b Automatic communication function a For a program example for normal automatic communication refer to Processing for normal automatic communication in 6 b b For a program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to Handling of automatic communication error in 6 b 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 Program example a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlocks depending on the link status of the remote master station local station and remote I O station other station The following example shows communication program interlocks using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station station No 1 H KO To SB47 Baton pass status host ho Ae ME J SB49 Host data link status ho 8 qe J SW70 Baton pass status of H KH each station qs Jl SW74 Cyclic transmission status H KD of each station m4 gt SW78 Parameter commun
28. The error log area stores the 32 latest errors The error log area stores the errors in order of occurrence starting from the error log 1 f 33 or more errors have occurred the error logs are overwritten starting from the area of the error log 1 Function Master function Contents Automatic 3 i Slave function E Dedicated instruction connection communication Stores a code corresponding to the error occurred at any timing such as during processing of a request message from the master at power on or when changing a MODBUS device assignment parameter Error code Refer to Section 11 3 3 for the error codes When an error occurs Stores an exception code returned from a for a request from the slave in reply to a request sent by the TP Exception code eer f master stores an Stores 0 automatic communication function or j exception code returned dedicated instruction to the master Stores the function code with which the error originated Stores the local station port No at error occurrence Local station port No n Stores 0 for an error occurred below the TCP UDP level at power on or in parameter setting Stores an IP address of the target station at error occurrence Target IP address Stores 0 for an error occurred below the IP level at power on or in parameter setting A Stores the port No of the target station at error occurrence Target device port No Stor
29. f MELSEC Q When the QJ71MT91 starts communication with the slave device with the automatic communication function the SD and RD LEDs turn ON Only when communicating On the Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB the start stop test of the automatic communication function can be performed Refer to Section 8 6 3 To start or stop the automatic communication function from a sequence program turn on off Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 and Automatic communication stop request Y6 Automatic communication start stop timing chart Automatic communication parameter i setting normally completed Automatic communication start Automatic communication istop Automatic communication parameter isetting normally completed Automatic communication start Automatic communication parameter creation communication communication function operating function operating RAUS gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program Precautions for starting stopping the automatic communication function 1 Be sure to turn on Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 after Module READY X0 and Basic parameter setting existence X3 have turned on 2 When using Automatic communication stop request Y6 to stop the autom
30. to OEOF System area use protte area use prohibited 3587 to 3599 OE10 to OE11 IP packet reception count 3600 to 3601 0E12 to Count of IP packet reception Section 0E13 discarded due to sum check 4134 3602 to 3603 error Sg 0E14 to 0E15 Total number of sent IP packets 3604 to 3605 0E16 to 0E29 System area use prohibited 3606 to 3625 Soe te Simultaneous transmission error Section H detection count 11 3 1 3626 to 3627 0E2C to OE2F 3628 to 3631 OE3E to OE4F 3646 to 3663 TCP packet reception count Count of TCP packet reception Section discarded due to sum check 0 1 3 1 3666 to 3667 error OF54 to pope number of sent TCP OES5 ackets On 3668 to 3669 pope System area use prohibited 0E30 to 0E31 ICMP packet reception count 3632 to 3633 0E32 to Count of ICMP packet reception 0E33 discarded due to sum check Ou 3634 to 3635 error Communi Total number of sent ICMP Communi cation packets H oe te 3837 cation status by 0537 j status ste Total number of ICMP echo 0 g Section H e H 3638 to 3639 yp ens request received 11 3 1 Total number of ICMP echo 0 H 3640 to 3641 reply sent ae to Total number of ICMP echo 0 H H 3642 to 3643 request sent TED fe Total number of ICMP echo 0 H H 3644 to 3645 reply received ce 0E56 to OEGF 3670 to 3695 System area use prohibited Semea 7 Continued on
31. 192 1 0 1 uses the MODBUS device assignment function Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the sett Assign Programmable controller CPU device cm Y100 Y2FF Y1FFF DO D3500 D8999 D12287 ing target QJ71MT91 ment details Output Y 512 points cm Data register D 5500 points QJ71MT91 buffer memory 5000x 55004 58FFu 5FFF User free area 1024 points Lg MODBUS devices 7 3 000001 li 512 points 000512 065536 Input register 300001 303500 5500 points 308999 365536 Holding register 400001 1024 points 401024 cz 465536 9 PROGRAMMING KeepAlive Routing information information setting MODBUS TCP setting 2 Parameter setting details The following table gives the setting details of the parameters set in the program example a Basic parameters Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value MELSEC Q TCP ULP timer value 00001 0 60 30s TCP zero window timer value TCP resend timer value 00014 1 20 10s 0002u 2 TCP end timer value 0003u 3 20 10s 40 20s IP reassembly timer value 0004u 4 10 5s 0005 5 Split reception monitoring timer value KeepAlive KeepAlive start timer value 00064 6 0007u 7 KeepAlive interval timer value KeepAlive resend count 09
32. 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1t02 9 2 4 Applicable Systemms at ooo deett otn s omo leg ea ae ale acere de iun d arte oe edu 2 1 2 2 Devices Necessary for Network Configuration sssssssseeneeneneenneeneneeeeeene nennen 2 3 2 3 System Configuration and Access Range sssssssssseseeeeeneeneen nennen nnne nne 2 4 2 4 Precautions for System Configuration essssssseeeeeeeeennen nennen nennen 2 6 2 5 Checking Function Version and Software Version ssssssssssseeeeeeeeeen nennen 2 7 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to 3 10 3 1 Performance Specifications eene nennt nnmnnn rennen 3 2 3 2 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU sessssseeeeeeeeenennnen nennen nnns 3 3 3 2 T O signal llSE s oct i e bem ed eiie 3 3 3 3 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory nennen nennen nnns 3 5 3 3 1 Buffer memory listare ea nineteenth tnnt insetti nre dh annes ns nnne 3 5 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 1to 4 20 4 1 MODBUS Standard Function Support List 4 1 4 2 Frame Specifications retine eet pene e eo Fe P ae Ee eL NEUE To HL NE UAE LE Eo ue RR 4 3 4 3 PDU Formats by EUnctlons ii i ne n bue a n e e ades 4 4 4 3 1 Read coils FC 01 d i n c I cod ER LO Do c e LE Dod E c Lo d He LR ce 4 6 4 3 2 Read discrete inputs F G 02 et edet at ent de aset antes 4 T 4 3 3 Read holding registers FC 03 u eimen eE NEE AE E ARARE NAA EARNER NA 4 8 4 3
33. Communication can be made with a MODBUS TCP device via a router 6 Ease of setting with utility package The optional utility package GX Configurator MB is available Though not required the use of the utility package allows on screen initial settings basic parameters automatic communication parameters MODBUS device assignment parameters and auto refresh settings reducing sequence programs and also facilitating the confirmation of the setting and operating statuses 1 1 It is recommended to use the utility package with the QJ71MT91 By making various parameter settings with the utility package communication can be made without sequence programs 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the QJ71MT91 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems 2 1 Applicable modules and base units and No of modules a When mounted with a CPU module For the CPU modules the number of modules and base units applicable to the QJ71MT91 refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used Note the following when the QJ71MT91 is used with a CPU module Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules and if the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules
34. D4000 0 f SET wov 04008 D4000 1 1 SET wov D4009 XI RST Automatic comm error status U0 G3104 0 ME RST XI RST Automatic comm error status UO G3104 1 E LRST Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer output area gt gt XO X6 UON BMOV D5000 G14848 Module Automatic READY comm operation status K64 M401 Nl M402 N2 K72 Y40 D9100 Y41 D9101 Y40 D4000 0 Y41 D4000 1 K100 END J MELSEC Q Refreshes automatic communication function buffer input area When automatic communication parameter 1 is normal When automatic communication parameter 2 is normal Acquires automatic communication operation status and automatic communication error code at automatic communication error Turns ON External output Y40 when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Turns ON External output Y41 when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Turns OFF External output Y40 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic 4 communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 Turns OFF External output Y41 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communicat
35. Mount a module within the number of I O points for the CPU module If the number of slots is within the available range the module can be mounted on any slot When using a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module b Mounting to a MELSECNET H remote I O station For the MELSECNET H remote I O station the number of modules and base units applicable to the QJ71MT91 refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 2 Support of the multiple CPU system When using the QJ71MT91 in a multiple CPU system refer to the QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System first 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 3 Supported software packages Relation between the system containing the QJ71MT91 and software package is shown in the following table GX Developer or GX Works2 is required to start up the system that uses the QJ71MT91 2 GX Developer 1 GX Configurator MB GX Works2 Single CPU system Version 7 or later Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Version 4 or later Q12H Q25HCPU Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Single CPU system Q02PH Q06PHCPU Version 8 68W or later Version 1 00A or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 45X or later Single CPU system A Q00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU
36. Not specified 1 A E A 0005H Holding register Write multiple registers 0505H Holding register 2 Holding register 23 Read Write multiple registers 1 To perform only read or write set 0 to each of the following Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS device head number Access points 2 Reading and writing can be performed simultaneously with one instruction only when 0505H Read write multiple registers is set 6 Head buffer memory address Read setting Write setting a As the head buffer memory address specify the head address of the buffer memory that will store the data read from or written to the slave b The head buffer memory address must not be duplicated in the automatic communication parameters 1 to 64 Set different head buffer memory addresses to each of the automatic communication parameters 7 Target MODBUS device head number Read setting Write setting a As the target MODBUS device head number specify the head number of the read or write target MODBUS device b As the target MODBUS device head number set last 5 digits of actual device number 1 Example Set 17 when the head number of the holding register is 400018 c When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 7 21 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 8 Access points Read setting Write setting a Set the number of points to be written to t
37. Programmable controller CPU MELSECNET H eo remote master module Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area ee D4003 D4008 E D4071 D4092 Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data D4095 D4096 D4159 D5000 W1388 Output data Output data D5099 W13EB LJ L1 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Slave MELSECNET H remote I O station MELSECNET H QJ71MT91 MODBUSY TCP slave device remote I O module 192 1 0 1 192 1 0 2 0C20H Coil 3104 Bit register 0cbau 000001 3107 EC 015001 0C67H 3175 Automatic communication error code storage area Automatic communication function buffer input area 016024 065536 MODBUS protocol 400001 Holding register Word register 3000 H 1 2288 Automatic communication function buffer output area W1388 3A00H 14848 gt 3A63H 14947 3FFF 1 SE T he 465536 PR RAMMIN een MELSEC Q b MODBUS device assignment function The setting target QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 uses the MODBUS device assignment function Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the setting target QJ71MT91 Assignment details Refer to Section 9 2 1 1 b for the assignment details
38. Split reception monitoring timer value I wmw Kl D6 KeepAlive c_i KOO D7 KeepAlive start timer value WwP K20 D8 KeepAlive interval timer value o U oo 8 D9 KeepAlive resend count MP KO D10 Router relay function Dov HOFFFFFF00 Di1 Subnet mask pattern DMOVP HO D13 Default router IP address MVP KO D15 Number of routers set T_T tov Ho D16 Subnet address DMOVP HO D18 Router IP address WVP K D48 J Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection 7P RENTO MM Ki Ki HO KO DO K49 M10 Transfers basic parameters to REMTO QJ71MT91 buffer memory instruction completion M10 M11 4 SET M20 Turns ON Basic parameter iouis REMO rar setting command M200 when Instruction instruction setting H 1 completion result command ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally M11 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference L Handling of ZP REMTO REMTO Manual Remote I O Network instruction error instruction Breed n Pm result 9 PROGRAMMING M20 Parameter setting command K272 MOVP K502 D272 MOVP K502 D273 D272 K2 M30 REMTO instruction completion M30 M31 J SET mo REMTO REMTO Parameter instruction instruction setting completion result command instruction instruction completion result RA
39. Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Starter Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Operating System English version x4 Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System English version x4 4 Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise Operating System English version 1 Install GX Configurator MB in GX Developer Version 4 or later in the same language GX Developer English version and GX Configurator MB Japanese version or GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator MB English version cannot be used in combination 2 GX Configurator MB is not applicable to GX Developer Version 3 or earlier 8 The recommended resolution is 1024 X 768 pixels or higher for Windows Vista and Windows 7 4 For 32 bit Windows 7 install GX Configurator MB Version 1 09K or later as an add in to GX Developer Version 8 91V or later For 64 bit Windows 7 install GX Configurator MB Version 1 09K or later as an add in to GX Developer Version 8 98C or later 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q Operating system and performance required for a personal computer Performance required for a personal computer Operating system Required memory Windows 95 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Windows 98 Pentium 1
40. Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH Single CPU t PIS Uie X ingle system 3 Version 8 48A or later Works2 Version 1 QO6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU g y Version 8 76E or later Common Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 1 08J or later Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Version 8 62Q or later Multiple CPU system QO3UDE Q04UDEH Single CPU system QO6UDEH Q13UDEH Version 8 68W or later Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Q10UDEH Single CPU system Version 8 76E or later Q20UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system CPU modules other than Single CPU system Not supported Not supported Multiple CPU system When mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O tati Version 6 01B or later Version 1 00A or later station amp 1 For the accessible range of GX Developer refer to Section 2 3 POINT When using GX Works2 refer to the following GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Devices Necessary for Network Configuration This section explains the devices that configure a network Please note that the network must be installed by qualified networking specialists to take sufficient safety measures The 10BASE T or 100BASE TX can be used to connect the QJ71MT91 to a network The QJ71MT91 will distinguish between 10BASE T and 100BASE TX and between the full duplex and ha
41. X04 Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X05 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed X06 Automatic communication operation status Section 3 2 1 x07 Automatic communication error status X08 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed X09 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed XOA MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence X1B COM ERR LED status X1C PING testcompleted X1F Watch dog timer error o o oo 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 2 Y Output signals To perform a test on output signals select any item in the Setting value column and click the Execute test button Buffer memory Reference Monitor Test Item f address section Y01 Basic parameter setting request NE CE Y04 Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request MOG Automatiocommunicationstopreqest Secion324 o8 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y1B COM ERR LED OFF request o o o o VIC PING testexecution request o d i 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 2 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter status Monitor Purpose Monitor the setting status of the basic parameters and MODBUS device assignment parameters Operating procedure Monitor Test
42. and setting result storage Error code and setting result clear MODBUS device assignmen parame er setting 0C14 to 0C 15 result storage area aaa gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a b When setting the MODBUS device assignment parameters with a sequence program set the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method of the intelligent function module switch setting refer to Section 6 6 to ON Start with the user set parameters Turn ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 after Module READY X0 and Basic parameter setting existence X3 have turned ON When the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 has turned ON correct the corresponding parameter in the following procedure 1 Refer to the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area address 0C 14H to 0C 15u 3092 to 3093 to identify the erroneous parameter 2 Refer to the MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area address 0C 13H 3091 to check the error details and correct the parameter 3 Make a MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request again Refer to Section 11 3 1 for details of the MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area and MODBUS device assignment parameter setting resul
43. completion result Acquires error code when nov D4008 D9100 automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid me y MR ST wm Tums ON External output Y41 REMFR REMFR when automatic communication instruction instruction parameter 2 is invalid completion result Acquires error code when automatic communication n Lov D4009 1810 parameter 2 is invalid X1007 Turns OFF External output EET M99 M M mt Y40 Y40 when automatic Automatic communication is normal comm error status Turns OFF automatic D4092 0 communication operation status HF RST D4000 0 for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 0 ay RST YA Turns OFF External output Automatic Y41 when automatic comm communication is normal error status Turns OFF automatic D4092 1 communication operation status A RST D4000 1 for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 Acquires automatic HKO 3 2P REMFR J KR KI HO K3104 D4000 K72 Maan communication operation status her and automatic communication completion error code at automatic communication error Qe 4 I Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q I W30 y Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference __ Handling of ZP REMFR Benes RENER A Manual Remote I O Network instruction error instruction instruction completion result 9 38 9 38
44. details 5 FUNCTIONS 5 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the QJ71MT91 5 1 Function List The function list of the QJ71MT91 is indicated below Automatic communication Dedicated instruction 1 Automatic response function 2 Master function 4 ell Slave function MODBUS device assignment function 3 KeepAlive function Ethernet function Router relay function IEEE802 3 frame Redundant system function GX Developer connection function QJ71MT91 status check function Hardware test Self loopback test Automatically issues device read write request messages from the master QJ71MT91 to the MODBUS TCP compatible slave device Allows reading writing of the MODBUS device at any timing with a sequence program Automatically performs the processing corresponding to the function code in the request message received from the master and automatically sends a response message Automatically converts access from the slave QJ71MT91 to the MODBUS device into access to the programmable controller CPU device Users can assign it as desired This enables direct access from the MODBUS TCP compatible master device to the programmable controller CPU device memory Confirms the status of communication with the target device where a TCP connection has been established When communication is not made for a given period of time between the QJ71MT91 and the open target device
45. device into access to a programmable controller CPU device Using MODBUS device assignment parameters the MODBUS devices are correlated with the programmable controller CPU device memory This allows direct access from the MODBUS T CP compatible master device to the programmable controller CPU device memory Since the QJ71MT91 supports large capacities of MODBUS devices all the device memories of the programmable controller CPU can be assigned Refer to Section 7 4 1 for the MODBUS device sizes 2 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a b Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters from the utility package GX Configurator MB Setting from a sequence program is also available Refer to Section 9 1 3 Refer to Section 7 4 for details of the MODBUS device assignment parameters As the MODBUS device assignment parameters the default assignment parameters are available Refer to Section 7 4 3 for the default assignment parameters MODBUS TCP master device Programmable Sequence program Device memory D300 controller CPU i unnecessary j QJ71MT91 D299 D300 MODBUS device assignment parameters Slave function MODBUS device 400499 K 400500 400501 Request message holding register 400500 read request Response message holding register 400500 12341 Ethernet
46. in the project window of GX Developer and double click PLC parameter 3 Click the lt lt I O assignment tab and click the Switch setting button The Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module screen is displayed Input format bd 1 O assignment setting screen Set the following to the slot where the QJ71MT91 Points Si seach ste is mounted X Detailed setting Type Select Intelli z Model name Enter the model name of the pos beast icto module Base etia Point Select 32 points Power model name Extension cable Slots ene 9 S Se ec 3 po S E C Den Start XY Enter the head I O number of the Bst Dua QJ71MT91 12 Slot Default Detailed setting Specify the control CPU of the Settings should be set as same when usi ing multiple CPU Import Muliple CPU Parameter Read PLC data QJ71MT91 in a multiple CPU system Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple CPU settings Default Check End Cancel Intelligent function module switch setting screen Click the Switch setting button on the I O Input format EES assignment setting screen to display the screen shown on the left Referring to 1 to 4 in this section make switch setting Entering the values in hexadecimal makes the setting easy Change the input format into
47. sssssssss 7 8 Text file sess 8 8 Transmission method ssse 3 2 Troubleshooting sese 11 1 Troubleshooting for other symptoms 11 7 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by LEDS sese Ido edo 11 1 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X Signals 4 iiio eee edes 11 3 Index 4 Type specification of the target MODBUS device ie eie pe ety 7 22 U Utility Package serina 8 1 GX Configurator MB functions 8 1 Installation of utility package 8 2 Uninstallation of utility package 8 2 IW Watch dog timer error sesesss 3 4 Weight reete 3 2 X X Y Monitor test sseeeeee 8 21 Index 4 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the fa
48. x 4 and x 3 represent standard values For details of the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O station of MLESECNET H refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Program example for automatic communication function After execution of the REMTO REMFR instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt X1000 X1006 D4092 0 MC NI M401 When automatic communication Module Automatic parameter 1 is normal READY communication operation status NI M01 Ie oe a ag ee ee eS 1 A Program for normal automatic communication parameter 1 4 E MCR NI Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 22 X1000 X1006 D4092 1 idi l M wc N2 M402 When automatic communication Module Automatic parameter 2 is normal READY communication operation status N2 M402 L T N2 lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt X1000 X1006 X1007 M330 Hm m ee 3 Module Automatic Automatic REMFR READY comm comm instruction operation error completion status status aif M aa a seq T Turns ON External output Y40 l i j L when automatic communication REMFR REMFR isi lid instruction instruction parameter 1 is invalid
49. 0000H o o 1 Use the following expression to find the set value of the head MODBUS device number Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of MODBUS device number to be set 1 The programmable controller CPU device range varies depending on the programmable controller CPU Refer to QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Depending on the programmable controller CPU some of the default assignment parameter range may not be usable In such a case observe either of the following not to access the devices outside the allowable range Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 7 4 Make the setting within the allowable programmable controller CPU device range Do not access any device outside the allowable range when using the default assignment parameters 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 4 MODBUS extended file register assignment 1 MODBUS extended file register assignment The MODBUS extended file register assignment to the programmable controller CPU is fixed to the file register ZR The MODBUS extended file register is assigned to the file register ZR of the programmable controller CPU as shown below Programmable controller MODBUS CPU file register ZR extended file register ZRO 600000 10000 File No 0 ZR9999 Y 609999 ZR10000 600000 10000 File No 1 ZR19999 609999 ZR20000 600000 10000 File No 2 ZR2999
50. 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 Turning Off the COM ERR LED This section explains how to turn off the COM ERR LED of the QJ71MT91 when it is lit 1 Remove possible error cause before turning off the COM ERR LED Refer to Section 11 1 11 3 If not the following operation will not turn off the COM ERR LED 2 The COM ERR LED turns on when an error occurs Once the COM ERR LED has turned on it does not turn off automatically even if the status returns to normal Use the following method to turn off the COM ERR LED Method Reference Section From GX Configurator MB From sequence program Section 11 4 2 11 4 1 From GX Configurator MB This section explains how to turn off the COM ERR LED from GX Configurator MB 1 Display the Monitor Test screen Refer to Section 8 6 Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT31 Setting item Current value LED ON status Lit INIT status OPEN status Not lit ERR status Not lit COM ERR status Not lit COM ERR LED OFF request Not requested XZY Monitor test Setting value Not requested XY Monitor test Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Basic MODBUS R device Automatic communication status Automatic communication Error log Error lo Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test
51. 2 All the host address bits are not 0 or 1 If the conditions are not satisfied a switch 3 4 error 7303u will occur In such a case correct the switch setting and then switch the power OFF then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU a When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a redundant system When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on the main base unit of a redundant System the IP addresses are assigned as follows System A control system IP address set System B standby system The fourth octet of IP address set 1 Example When 192 168 0 1 is set System A control system 192 168 0 1 System B standby system 192 168 0 2 Also the IP address assignment at a system switching differs depending on the IP mode type set using the switch 5 For fixed IP mode Fixed IP addresses are assigned to system A and system B Even if a System switching occurs the IP addresses are not switched For redundant IP mode IP addresses are assigned to the control system and standby system If a system switching occurs the IP addresses are also switched When a value of 254 is set to the fourth octet of IP address of system A or control system the fourth octet of IP address of system B or standby system will be 253 6 14 6 14 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 4 Redundant settings Switch 5 When the redundant system is used set the conditions of a system switching b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 S
52. 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 2 Target slave port No for automatic communication function Set the target slave port No for issuing a request message using the automatic communication function master function of the QJ71MT91 1 The specifications of the MODBUS TCP protocol define that 502 should be used as the port No for the slave In this setting the default value is 502 and normally need not be changed 2 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 3 CPU response monitoring timer value a When the QJ71MT91 receives a request message from the master and the programmable controller CPU starts its processing the QJ71MT91 waits for the response from the programmable controller CPU The time allowed for the QJ71MT91 to wait is set by the CPU response monitoring timer value This timer allows the QJ71MT91 to cancel the wait status on the master side when a response to the master is not available due to an error occurred in the programmable controller CPU Master device 2 g i o o Q A g E 8 o 3 c c e m T o 2 ra E ra 2 2 g ui M nna eenaa ennnen AERA QJ71MT91 ERU 2 3 CPU response f C L4 a LL monitoring timer f Start Reset Start Timeout Programmable Processin Error occurred controller CPU i 7 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q b The QJ71MT91 starts the CP
53. 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 3 3 Program without using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking Switch setting on lt lt I O assignment gt gt of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 3 1 for the intelligent function module switches 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters using a sequence program Parameter setting can be omitted under the following conditions Parameter Setting Omitting Condition Parameter Condition Setting method With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the basic parameter starting method bit 0 to 0 Start with the default parameters Refer to Section 9 2 3 1 Basic parameters Use the default parameters 1 Do not use the automatic communication function master No need to set function Automatic communication parameters With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the MODBUS device assignment parameter Use the default ters 2 Pehe defe parametara starting method bit 1 to 0 Start with the default MODBUS device assignment parameters parameters Refer to 9 2 3 1 Do not use the MODBUS device assignment function slave function No need to set 1 To utilize the basic parameters with the initial values refer to Section 7 2 1 it is recommended to use the default parameters 2 When the device assignment of the CPU is not changed it is recommended
54. Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operation status 5 WOFFC 1 to 64 User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup Cancel PR RAMMIN uir 2 MELSEC Q 4 Network parameter setting Set the network parameters on Network parameter of GX Developer 1 Network type MNET H remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000x 3 Network No 1 4 Total number of slave stations 1 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting M station gt A station Nae Saw ee ee 7 Refresh parameters Dev name Points Stat End Dev name Points Stat End TransferSB SB sta 0000 FF SB 1 s12 0000 TransferSw sw st2 0000 Orr e Random cycle B T Lv selle M Transfert Lw S092 0000 IFFF Tranfe2 LX 32 100 TE Transfers Lv 32 1000 10lF De et e ent Transfer 0 Manses je b Automatic communication function a For a program example for normal automatic communication refer to Processing for normal automatic communication in 6 b b For a program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to Handling of automatic communication error in 6 b The automatic communication error code can be monitored on th
55. Automatic communication parameter error code storage area a When an error occurs with the automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area b The error code is stored when the automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 turns ON c The error code is cleared when the automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X4 turns ON Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area a When an automatic communication parameter error occurs with the automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 ON the automatic communication parameter number corresponding to the error is stored in this area b The automatic communication parameter number is stored when the automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 turns ON c The automatic communication parameter number is cleared when the automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X4 turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area a When a MODBUS device assignment parameter error occurs while the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 is ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area b The error code is stored when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 turns ON c The er
56. Check whether more than the Retry after the dedicated instructions executable dedicated instructions 8 being executed are completed Chapter 10 instructions were started Check whether the dedicated instruction Refer to Dedicated instruction failed This section failed or not 32 Check whether the module is waiting for e Wait for the response monitoring timer a response from the target device with to expire Section 7 2 the dedicated instruction already being Check the target device status This section executed If an error occurs refer to Dedicated 3 2 instruction failed Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on This section 1 4 Confirm the error code or exception Take the corresponding corrective action Chapter 10 code stored in the control data of the and retry Section 11 3 ection 11 dedicated instruction Check whether the target device MBRW instruction gt supports the corresponding function Change the device type of the control Section 10 2 code data so that the function code supported by the target device is issued MBREOQ instruction Change the send data so that the Section 10 3 function code supported by the target device is issued When the MBREQ dedicated instruction Correct the request message and retry Chapter 4 is used check the created request Section 10 3 message Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made if each par
57. Connection to 10BASE T 100BASE TX 6 6 Connection to Ethernet 6 6 Connector applicable for external wiring 3 2 Control keys niensis 8 6 CPU response monitoring timer value 7 17 Data transmission rate ssss 3 2 Dedicated instructions sssse 5 9 Dedicated instruction list 10 1 Dedicated instruction performance App 4 Dedicated instruction processing time App 4 MBREQ Instruction sss 10 11 MBRW Instruction eesssssse 10 2 Default assignment parameters 7 29 Default router IP address 7 13 Device code sss 7 27 Device symbol sene 7 27 Index 1 E F G Error code list sssssssssssss 11 23 Error code storage areas 11 15 Error codeso aa a 11 15 Error log caidas 8 26 11 18 Error log area 11 18 Error log write pointer 11 18 Ethernet function seesssssssss 5 1 Exception code list ssssssse 11 21 Extended file register 7 25 External dimensions App 1 Features 1 1 Fraction bitSicah 26 6 Mee eae hl 7 22 Frame specifications ssss
58. Count up all the setting items on this screen and add the total to the number of settings for other intelligent Make lest fie End setup Cancel function modules to get a grand total 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 2 2 Operating environment This section describes the operating environment of the personal computer that runs GX Configurator MB Installation add in target GX Developer Version 4 English version or later 4 Personal computer Personal computer running one of the following operating systems CPU Refer to the next page Operating system and performance required for personal Required memory computer For installation 65MB or more Resolution 800 x 600 pixels or higher 3 Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista Business Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Vista
59. MELSEC Q c Automatic communication operation flowchart Using the set automatic communication parameters the automatic communication function operates according to the repeat interval timer and response monitoring timer settings as shown below i Repeat interval timer expires 1 2 QJ71MT91 sends a request message to the slave 3 Response monitoring timer starts Slave s response condition For normal response For exception response QJ71MT91 receives a response Response monitoring timer expires message from the slave Response monitoring timer stops 9 Corresponding bit of Automatic communication operation status turns on 1 Error is set Corresponding bit of Automatic communication operation status turns off 0 Normal is set 7 Repeat interval timer starts QJ71MT91 Master function 1 7 1 7 1 7 Timeout Start Timeout Start Timeout Start Repeat interval timer 16 9 6 t 3 5 p 38 8 1 3 5 Start Stop Start Timeout Start Stop Response C monitoring timer i i i 2 jc cod ka E RET Request Response Led E ime age message message 2 a 2 14 Y Request Response _ Recovery message message MODBUSS TCP Request Response Error slave device pee pee 5 6 5 6 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Automatic communication function buffer areas
60. Make test file Stop monitor 11 40 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Turn off the COM ERR LED In the Setting value field of the COM ERR LED OFF request select Being requested and click the Execute test button Monitor Test Module information Module type X MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Current value Setting value LED ON status INIT status ERR status COM ERR status COM ERR LED OFF request XZY Monitor test Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Automatic communication status E Basic MODBUS R device Error log Automatic communication E Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Monitoring Select input Setting range Not requested Being requested Execute test 3 Confirm the COM ERR LED is turned off When the processing is completed a Completed message appears Confirm that the Current value field of COM ERR status has changed from Lit to Not lit Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module modelname QJZ1MTSI Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item LED ON status INIT status OPEN status Current value Setting value COM ERR status COM XZY Monitor test Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter s
61. PO vut i i 4 MCR N2 9 PROGRAMMING lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt X1000 X1006 X1007 M330 f M Ko gt Module Automatic Automatic REMFR READY comm comm instruction operation error completion status status M330 M331 D4000 0 1 H Xr E SET Y40 REMFR REMFR instruction instruction completion result MOV D4008 D9100 F M330 M331 D4000 1 f SET Y41 REMFR REMFR instruction instruction completion result Mov D4009 D9101 X1007 RST Y40 F Automatic comm error status D4000 0 RST D4000 0 X1007 RST Y41 Automatic comm error status D4000 1 M RST D4000 1 KO 7P REMFR H K3 K1 HO K3104 D4000 K72 M330 REMFR instruction completion lI as Gu ax dM cca EE EEN ee ee MD et E EAEN ll M330 M331 Take corrective action for error completion referringtoQ I m Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference F RENIA X Manual Remote I O Network struction REMFR instruction I A Rg A th RE E completion result Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer output area X1000 X1006 M310 1 KO Module Automatic REMTO READY comm instruction operation completion status KO gt Pr REMTO H K4 Ki HO K14848 D5000 K100 N310 REMTO instruction completion SS SS SS uei SS ui mu SSS SS SS SS SS SS es remite reni a M310 M311 Take corrective action for error completion ref
62. PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Setting A rough procedure for operation is shown below Pre operational procedures y Mount the QJ71MT91 to the base unit h d Connect GX Developer and programmable controller CPU with the cable y Conduct a hardware test ees Refer to Section 6 5 1 y Run a self loopback test eects Refer to Section 6 5 2 v v Set the intelligent function module switches with GX Developer Connect the Ethernet cable to the QJ71MT91 and connect it tothe network 000 EO Refer to Section 6 4 Set the operation mode to Online using GX Developer Refer to Section 6 6 Set the parameters using GX Configurator MB or sequence program sen Refer to Chapter 7 Use utility software to set parameters Set parameters GX Configurator MB PEL Refer to Chapter 8 e Refer to Chapter 9 When using the dedicated instructions create a sequence program for communication Set parameters with a sequence program een Refer to Chapter 10 y Write the parameters etc that are set for the programmable controller CPU reset the programmable controller CPU and bring it into RUN status 1 Conduct a PING test to confirm connection with the target device Operation een Refer to Section 11 5 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURE
63. QJ71MT91 or MODBUS CP device exists or not on Ethernet same subnet address where the QJ71MT91 is connected or if a target device personal computer having the specified IP address exists or not b Perform a PING test to check the following 1 Whether the QJ71MT91 is correctly connected to the other device on the line 2 Whether the basic parameter setting of the QJ71MT91 is correct 2 Buffer memory addresses used for PING test The following buffer memory addresses are used for a PING test Parameter Name Communication time check Transmission count IP address Setting Specify the waiting time for completion of the PING test Set time set value x 500ms Specify the number of transmissions Specify the IP address of the PING test target device Setting Range 2 to 60 1 to 10 Refer to 1 Default 000000004 OFE4H 4068 OFE5H 4069 OFE6x 4070 OFE7H 4071 11 44 Execution result PING test The execution result of the PING test is stored When completed with an error the error code is stored Refer to Section 11 3 3 0000u Normal completion 00014 to Error completion Error code execution results Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count The total packet transmission count success count and failure count for the PING test execution are stored 1 Set the value that satisfies th
64. Signal Direction Programmable controller CPU QJ71MT91 Device No Reference Signal name section lt gt lt O lt vj UJ lt m YF Section 11 4 2 Section 11 5 2 Section 11 1 Y10 E m Use prohibited Y12 Y13 Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 Y18 Y19 Y1A COM ERR LED OFF request Y1B ON Being requested OFF Not requested PING test execution request Section 11 4 2 VIC ON PING test execution being Section requested 11 5 2 OFF PING test execution not request Y1D Y1E Use prohibited Y1F Among the I O signals for the programmable controller CPU do not output turn ON the Use prohibited signals Doing so may cause the programmable controller system malfunction w 1 Az 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 3 1 Buffer memory list A buffer memory list is given below Read Initial Reference Address Application Name Initial Value Write pu 1 Section o TCP ULP timer value Set time set value X 500ms inp ES SOOT TCP zero window timer value 14420 Set time set value X 500ms i 0002 TCP resend timer value 20 T EER Set time set value X 500ms Men E 0003 ds TCP end timer value t ers S Set time set value x 500ms TS 0004 IP reassembly timer value 10 Set time set value X 500ms RW 0005 Split reception monitoring timer H value 3C4 60 R W Set tim
65. Station No Station No that does not overlap on the same loop Protocol TCP App 7 App 7 APPENDICES MELSEC Q b PLC side I F 1 Select Ethernet module and double click it to display the PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module screen Set PLC and IP address on the PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module screen PLC 555557 Select QU71E71 IP address Set the IP address of the QJ71MT91 to be connected IP input format Select DEC or HEX Since Station No and Routing parameter transfer method are not used leave them as displayed on the screen 2 3 PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module fe Network No Station No IP address C HostName IP input format Routing parameter transfer method Automatic response system E c Other station Select Other station Single network d Network route 1 Select Ethernet and double click it to display the Network communication route Detailed setting of Ethernet screen 2 Select Access to Ethernet module set on PLC side I F on the Network communication route Detailed setting of Ethernet screen Network communication route Detailed setting of Ethernet x Other station in the same loop or access to multilevel system Cancel Network No Station No App 8 App 8 INDEX 5 A 5VDC internal current consumption 3 2 Access points nein t
66. This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire e When using a wireless communication device such as a cellular phone keep a distance of 25cm 9 85 inch or more from the programmable controller in all directions Failure to do so can cause a malfunction e Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause module failure or malfunctions e Do not install remove the module to from the base unit more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Failure to do so may cause malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operating Precautions NCAUTION e Please read the manual carefully and confirm the safety thoroughly before performing control operations especially modifications of data programs and operation status status control of the programmable controller that is running Incorrect modifications of data programs and operating status may cause system malfunctions damages to the machines or accidents Disposal Precautions NCAUTION e Dispose of this product as an industrial waste e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions
67. VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Safety Guidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to one of the manuals listed under 1 THE MANUAL S USAGE AND STRUCTURE How to use this manual This manual describes the pre operation procedure functions etc by use of the MODBUS TCP interface module QJ71MT91 on a purpose by purpose basis Refer to the corresponding section when you need to know the following 1 Features Chapter 1 Chapter 1 describes the features of the QJ71MT91 2 System configuration Chapter 2 a Section 2 1 describes the applicable programmable controller CPUs and compatible software packages b Section 2 2 describes the devices necessary to configure a network c Section 2 3 describes the system configurations that use the QJ71MT91 and the accessible range 3 Performance and specifications Chapter 3 a Section 3 1 provides the performance sp
68. a Automatic communication function buffer areas The automatic communication function uses the following buffer memory areas Application Buffer Memory Address Automatic communication function Stores data read from the 10004 to 1FFFy buffer input area slave Automatic communication function Stores data to be written 30004 to 3FFFH buffer output area to the slave Transfer direction of automatic communication function buffer input output area The following shows the transfer directions of data stored into the buffer memory by the automatic communication function 1 Transfer direction in automatic communication function buffer input area When receiving a response message from the slave the QJ71MT91 writes data to the automatic communication function buffer input area in descending order of the addresses in 1 word 16 bits unit 2 Transfer direction in automatic communication function buffer output area When sending a request message to the slave the QJ71MT91 creates it by reading data from the automatic communication function buffer output area in descending order of the addresses in 1 word 16 bits unit QJ71MT91 Master function MODBUSS TCP slave device Buffer memory Automatic Programmable anion QJ71MT91 controller CPU side read direction ma sae Area 4m Response message data read 10004 to 1FFFH direction Automatic Programmable communication QJ71MT91 controller CPU function buffer s
69. a slave and returns a response message 2 The QJ71MT91 operates as a master and issues a request message to the slave b Example of communication between QJ71MT91 and QJ71MT91 The both functions can be operated bi directionally between QJ71MT91 and QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 Master slave function Master slave function Request message Response message 4 Support of GX Developer connection via Ethernet GX Developer can be connected to Ethernet via the QJ71MT91 This enables the maintenance of the programmable controller CPU via Ethernet A QJ71MT91 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 5 Supporting Ethernet functions for more reliability high speed communication and flexible system construction The following Ethernet functions are supported for more reliability high speed communication and more flexible system construction a KeepAlive function The status of communication with the target device where a TCP connection has been established can be checked When communication is not made for a given period of time between the QJ71MT91 and the open target device the QJ71MT91 checks the target device for existence and cuts off unnecessary TCP connections b 100 Mbps high speed communication Supporting 100BASE TX the QJ71MT91 can make 100Mbps high speed communication c Router relay function
70. and to multiple holding 23 Read write multiple registers Section 4 3 12 registers Reads values from the holding registers in FIFO queue 24 1 Read FIFO queue structure Read device identification Reads the module identification information of the slave 1 The QJ71MT91 slave function does not support this function However it can be issued from the master QJ71MT91 by use of the MBREQ instruction 2 The function codes 07 08 11 12 and 17 are the functions dedicated to the MODBUS serial protocol 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Standard function support list by master and slave functions The following table indicates a standard function support list classified by the master and slave functions of the QJ71MT91 Master Function 3 Function Code Automatic Function EA MBRW instruction MBREQ Slave Function Sub Code communication so k4 f instruction function Read discrete inputs 07 1 2 O O O JO OJOJOJO KIX 1X1 alata fa O O S 01 02 03 04 05 15 16 0 6 08 1 2 Get communications event 11 1 2 counter 12 1 2 17 12 2 245 Writefierecod x o O O 6 22 Maskwriteregister x X O O 5 233 Readhwrite muttipleregisters o o gt o O O Supported X Not supported OJO O JOJO O O O x xX x XIxX x oa oa I x c1 O O o 1 The QJ71MT91 slave function does
71. at the lowest device number 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The programmable controller CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 1 The request message data stored in the request message storing devices S2 1 to S2 n are sent in order of L low order to H high order bytes starting at the lowest device number 2 When the request message size is an odd number the last high byte of the request message storing device is ignored The data are not sent 10 13 10 13 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Response message storing devices e tem eto pea Bes Device Item Set Data zit Range Side Set the size of the received response message in byte units 0 to 253 Set the contents function code data of the received response message Example When the response message with Read holding registers FC 03 is received Received response message frame Function code Function code Number of read Device data Device data bytes 1 2 04H 2 00H 05H Receiving order k 6 bytes lt Contents stored in response message storing devices and their order gt b15 b8 b7 bO lt D1 0 gt Response message size 6 bytes As described on the left bO lt D1 1 gt lt D1 2 gt Response message lt D1 3 gt 34H 12H Received dat
72. automatic communication error in 5 9 PROGRAMMING 5 Program example lt lt Basic parameter setting gt gt X20 X0 L M M PAT diwwP k60 Parameter Module setting READY command MVP K20 wovP Ko0 MovP K40 MP Ki0 WoVP K60 wvP KI a O E s L K20 wvP K3 n OP ko DMOVP HOFFFFFF00 n OP Ho MovP Ko DMOVP Ho s S H0 wvP KI MovP K502 s L MVP Ki0 DMOVP H0C0010002 s i 2 SET Uo G0 UOX Gl UOV G2 UOX G3 Uo a4 UOX G5 UOX G6 UOX 67 UOX G8 UOX G9 UOX G10 UOX G11 UOY G13 UOY G5 UOX G16 UO G18 UOX G48 UO G272 UOX G273 UOX G276 UOV G277 UO G279 Yi Lo dy Lu MELSEC Q TCP ULP timer value TCP zero window timer value TCP resend timer value TCP end timer value IP reassembly timer value Split reception monitoring timer value KeepAlive KeepAlive start timer value KeepAlive interval timer value KeepAlive resend count Router relay function Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address J Number of routers set J Subnet address Router IP address Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection Local slave station port No Target slave port No for automatic communication function CPU response monitoring timer value Prefe
73. bytes per instruction P Automatic response Function for receive 12 functions Chapter 4 function 64k points 64k points Master function Slave function MODBUS Input register 64k points Section device size Holding register 64k points Extended file register Max 4086k points No of simultaneously acceptable request 64 messages Number of simultaneously connectable GX connection Developers function Number of occupied I O points 32 points 5VDC internal current consumption 0 52A 98 3 86 in H lt 27 4 1 08 in W x External dimensions 90 3 54 in D mm Weight 0 11kg 1 Length between a hub and a node K2 This is the maximum number of cascade connection stages when a repeater hub is used For the maximum number of cascade connection stages contact to the manufacturer for the switching hub used 3 Indicates the number of TCP connections that can be established simultaneously 4 Indicates the maximum number of slaves that can be communication targets 5 Indicates the maximum number of dedicated instructions that can be started simultaneously from a sequence program GX Developer Max 8 GX Developers Appendix 1 zi gt A 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 I O Signals for Programmable Controller CPU This section explains the I O signals of the QJ71MT91 for the programmable controller CPU 3 2 1 I O signal list The following table shows the I O signals of th
74. causing a malfunction e Be careful not to let any foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the module They may cause fire as well as breakdowns and malfunctions of the module e A protective sheet is pasted on the upper part of the module in order to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips to get inside the module while wiring Do not remove this protective sheet during wiring work However be sure to remove the protective sheet before operating the module to allow heat radiation during operation Setup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING e Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so may cause electric shocks or malfunctions e Before cleaning the module or retightening the module mounting screws make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause the module to electric shocks breakdown or malfunction If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off CAUTION e Before performing online operations especially program modification forced output or operating status change by connecting a peripheral device to a running CPU read the manual carefully and ensure the safety Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents e Never disassemble or modify the module
75. command KO gt HKO gt r REMTO JI KI KI HO K512 D512 K24 M101 REMTO instruction completion M101 M102 j 4 SET vi004 REMTO REMTO instruction instruction completion result pue cm 5 SS SS SS d cm e SS eS smi c in a M102 Take corrective action for error completion referring toQ I M Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference H REMTO Manual Remote l O Network instruction L eee ee X i X X i X i X i i i i i i X 4 result MELSEC Q Initializes automatic communication parameter setting area Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device Head buffer memory address Target MODBUSG device head number Access points Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS device head number Access points Turns OFF Automatic communication parameter setting command M100 Transfers automatic communication parameters to QJ71MT91 buffer memory Turns ON Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y1004 when ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q X1004 E lii RST Y1004
76. command M322 after instruction instruction peni acquiring automatic B comman n completion result communication operation status eS ea es er Si 5 storage area data 321 Take corrective action for error completion referringtoQ k Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference r Handling of Z REMFR utes Manual Remote I O Network instruction error i i n result RST M322 J Turns OFF Normal processing Normal command M322 when Module a READY X1000 or Automatic communication operation status X1006 is OFF Automatic communication operation status lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt eo E M322 D4092 0 KR P T iu6 Ni M401 When automatic communication imm Automatic Normal parameter 1 is normal READY comm processing operation command status M 1 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 1 i le a ha i a n E MCR NI lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 2 gt gt uv ENS eS M322 D4092 1 KS A s a h N2 M402 When automatic communication m am Automatic Normal parameter 2 is normal READY comm processing operation command status N2 M402 DE CHURCH ERN ET IMPO RACES RETIA a 1 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 2 ko SR uu me me jm cmd ass
77. devi a ES DRE Sana usc ee Third party User application Remote I O CNC QJ71MT91 programmable Slave Slave Slave Slave function controller Sos Slave MODBUS serial A mca im x slave device Third party i programmable controller MELSEC A series M3 programmable controller AJ71UC24 S2 Remote I O E E E Bj Accessible from QJ71MT91 master function to each slave EEE Accessible from each master to QJ71MT91 slave function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 GX Developer connection a Accessible range of GX Developer Refer to Appendix 3 for the GX Developer connection setup examples Access path via QJ71MT91 GX Developer QJ71MT91 z I Connected programmable controller TEST MODBUS TCP b Precautions for GX Developer connection When the QJ71MT91 and Ethernet module exist together on the same Ethernet access cannot be made between the QJ71MT91 and Ethernet module QJ71MT91 Ethernet and MODBUS TCP mixed network 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 4 Precautions for System Configuration 1 For use in a redundant system When using the QJ71MT91 in a redundant system refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 5 Checking Function Version and Software Version This se
78. device Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Hardware fault Continued on next page 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q ipti i iv i Code 7405u 7420H 11 36 Receive error Send error Broadcast address specification error Ethernet address error IP check sum error A receive error occurred COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR The internal receive buffer has no free space A send error occurred The broadcast address was specified in TCP based transmission The Ethernet address of the target device is unknown COM ERR COM ERR A check sum error was detected in the IP protocol Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Hardware fault Retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Hardware fault Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Hardware fault Review the IP address setting of the target device at the time of transmission Review the IP address of the target devic
79. device area gt bF to bO bF to bO Read 116640 to 116625 lt 1 116656 to 116641 116672 to 116657 Remaining area is masked by 0 Write When the write access points are 5 points Write data storing device S2 gt Target slave device area F to bO Write bF to bO v 1 122544 to 122529 b 10 5 10 5 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 6 MELSEC Q MODBUS device data are read from and written to the slave specified in the target IP address of the control data The processing used in the automatic communication function can be performed from a sequence program at any timing A maximum of eight MBRW instructions can be executed simultaneously Any instructions attempted in excess of the limit are ignored Create a sequence program carefully so that the number of simultaneously executed MBRW instructions does not exceed 8 The QJ71MT91 automatically opens a TCP connection with a target slave when this instruction is executed Whether TCP connection closing processing is performed or not can be selected in Execution type S1 0 of the control data When communication with the same target device is made frequently using the dedicated instruction setting TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion saves the time required
80. e E Det eei aste boc AE E Let eie aca ate Lec odo cale Det efe ae a E d 11 15 11 3 1 Emror code storage areas nii np t eerte ate reed pe ide eee Efe tree dp EAEE 11 15 11 3 2 Exception code Si a a a a a a r E a a r aaae aTi 11 21 11 3 3 Error code list raaa e UR a Hed te e La e i a Ree a et 11 23 11 4 Turning Off the COM ERR LED ssssssssssssesee nennen nennen nnne nr nennen nnn nene nennen 11 40 11 4 1 From GX Config rator MB utter redetpe ces cete run vt see eo uva pe aeo dan aN 11 40 11 4 2 Program example for use of sequence program ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeenneen 11 43 11 5 Conducting PING Test to Check QJ71MT91 Connection seen 11 44 11 5 T From GXConfigurator MB xen eti eet ete tte ete get tee Rte tr idee ds 11 45 11 5 2 Program example for use of sequence program sssssssssssssssseeeeeneen 11 49 APPENDICES App 1 to App 8 Appendix 1 External Dimensions c ccceccceeecceeeceeeeceeeneeeeaeeseaeeecaceeeeaeesaeescaeeecaeeeseceseeaeeseaeessueeeeieeetans App 1 Appendix 2 Function Upgrade of the QU71MT911 sssssssssssssssssseseeeeeenene nennen App 2 Appendix 3 Processing Time ssssssssssssssssssssseseeeeee entente nmt entr tn nnne nensi ntes nrn snnt nnns App 2 Appendix 4 GX Developer Connection Setup Example sss App 6 INDEX Index 1 to Index 4 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW
81. environment of the System is within the range of general specifications of the CPU module Check whether the power capacity is sufficient or not Perform the test again If the above does not solve the problem a probable cause is a hardware error Check if the programmable controller CPU and base unit are normal referring to the manual for each module Or replace either of the modules to check the operation In case of failure please consult your local Mitsubishi representative In the offline mode delete GX Configurator MB parameters set in the programmable controller CPU Do not turn on Basic parameter setting request Y 1 in the offline mode Do not turn on Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 in the offline mode Do not turn on Automatic communication stop request Y6 in the offline mode Do not turn on MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 in the offline mode Do not turn on PING test execution request Y 1C in the offline mode Continued on next page 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code 73D1H 73D2H 73D3u 73D4u As the TCP connection was cut off from the target device the slave function of the QJ71MT91 could not send a response message Response message As the TCP connection was cut off from the target device the response message could not be returned via GX Developer c
82. for TCP connection opening for the subsequent instruction execution Whether the MBRW instruction is being executed or not and whether it is completed normally or not can be confirmed in the MODBUS exception code S1 2 and the completion device D2 and completion status indication flag D2 1 specified in the set data a MODBUS exception code Stores the exception code when the processing in the slave is completed with an error b Completion device D2 Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBRW instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing c Completion status indication device D2 1 Turns ON OFF depending on the status of the MBRW instruction completion Normal completion Remains OFF Error completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBRW instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 10 6 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Operation for MBRW instruction execution END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program i j a E d MBRW instruction Completion device D2 Completion status indication device D2 1 Error 10 7 Completion of MBRW ON instruction execution OFF M O 0 550252202220 i ON OFF E i 1 rror ION completion Noma OFF MEME i p compietiony O 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed with an error the completion sta
83. function module utility setting Screen x may be displayed for the model name This means that the required utility has not been installed or the utility cannot be started from GX Developer Check the required utility selecting Tools Intelligent function utility Utility list in GX Developer 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 4 Initial Setting Purpose Set parameters on the initial setting screen This setting eliminates the need for parameter setting by sequence programs The initial setting are as follows Basic parameters Automatic communication parameters MODBUS device assignment parameters Operating procedure Start I O No Module type Module model name Initial setting Setting Screen Initial setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 Setting item Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric 5A Basic parameter Basic parameter Automatic communication parameter MODBUS R device assignment Automatic communication parameter MODBUS R device assignment parameter Details Make text file End setup Cancel Explanation of items 1 Parameter settings Select a button under the Setting value and set the parameters on the corresponding screen Basic parameter setting refer to Section 8 7 1 Automatic communication parameter s
84. function was started or stopped without the basic parameter being set The automatic communication function was started when parameter setting was being made on GX Configurator MB at power on When the QJ71MT91 on the main base unit of a redundant System is mounted the automatic communication function of the master function was attempted to be executed When the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction is used the target slave device returned an exception code in reply to the request message sent by the QJ71MT91 In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the number of bytes in the received response message is less or more than necessary The value of the reference number in the response message received by the dedicated instruction is incorrect COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Review the setting of the request message size After turning ON the Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 do not turn ON the Basic parameter setting request Y1 until the Automatic communication operation status X6 turns ON Start or stop the automatic communication function with Basic parameter setting existence X3 on When using GX Configurator MB Switch the power on and then turn on Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4
85. i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Ele
86. in order of the automatic communication parameters 1 to 64 bF bE bD bC bB bA b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO ew fsf e EEA 0C21 BE 29 28 27 sis 22 21 Zr d 0C234 64 63 62 61 60 59 nm 54 53 52 51 50 49 The numbers indicate the automatic communication parameter numbers c The operation status is set at the following timing 1 When a response message error completion is received from a slave Only the corresponding bit turns ON 2 When a communication error occurs Only the corresponding bit turns ON d The operation status is cleared at the following timing 1 When a response message normal completion is received from a slave Only the corresponding bit turns ON 2 When the automatic communication function stops All bits turn OFF 3 When the power is turned off and then on again or when the programmable controller CPU is reset All bits turn OFF e Interlock with a target device The automatic communication operation status storage area can be used as an interlock signal for a target device error Here is a program example 1 Program condition The QJ71MT91 is mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 0 and the automatic communication parameter 1 is used 2 Program example Command pe ee ete ss er E EE Meta a E SEN signal U0 G3104 0 1 1 Processing with data read from target device 4 by automatic communication parameter
87. in text file format Start monitor Stop monitor Selects whether or not to monitor current values Execute test Performs a test on the selected items To select more than one item select them while holding down the Ctrl key Close Closes the screen that is currently open and returns to the previous screen 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Monitor Test Module information Module ype MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MTS1 Monitor Test screen Sub screen shift Start 1 0 No Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module modelname QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 MELSEC Q Setting item MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Current value Setting value Setting item Current value Setting value Basic parameter setting existence Parameters set Basic parameter error code storage area Switch 1 Operation mode setting status Online Switch 2 Commurication condition setting status Basic parameter starting method Default parameter IMODBUSIR device assignment parameter setting existence Parameters set MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting method Default parameter Online change enable disable Disable Send frame specification Ethemetv20 MODBUS A device assignment parameter eror code storage area
88. input 32 100032 status The device number stored in the response message is actually read written device number 1 2 Overview of request response message format given in this section a Request response message format diagram The following indicates the overview of the request response message format diagram given in Section 4 3 1 to 4 3 12 Area name Function code Frame contents Furiction code Head coil number Read points Request message format 0000n to FFFFu 00014 to 07DOx Setting range Response message format H L Value stored in response message v im v zd 1 byte 1 byte T When 2 bytes comprise 1 data the high 8 bits 8 bits order byte 8 bits are represented as H and the low order byte 8 bits as L b Response message format The format of a response message issued by the slave to the master differs depending on whether the processing in the slave has been completed normally or not In Section 4 3 1 to 4 3 12 the formats for normal completion and error completion are provided 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Storage location of exception code and error code On error completion of processing in the slave QJ71MT91 an exception code is sent to the master Refer to the Response message format when completed with an error given in Section 4 3 1 to 4 3 12 The exception code is also stored into the QJ71MT91 buffer memory Further to
89. intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting b0 Basic parameter Section 6 6 starting method select OFF Start with the default parameters Check if the basic parameter setting Refer to Basic parameter setting error This section error completed X2 is on completed X2 turned on 2 3 5 OPENLED does When using the automatic Refer to Automatic communication not turn on communication function parameter setting error completed X5 The SD LED does turned on or Automatic not flicker during communication operation status X6 This section 2 5 2 7 data transmission does not turn on The RD LED does When using dedicated instruction Refer to Dedicated instruction is not This section not flicker during executed 3 1 data reception When using slave function Refer to Slave function of QJ71MT91 does not return response message to This section request message 3 3 When using GX Developer connection Refer to GX Developer cannot be This section connected 3 4 11 2 11 2 Module READY X0 turned off Watch dog timer error X1F turned on Basic parameter setting error completed X2 turned on Basic parameter setting existence X3 does not turn on Automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 turned on MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 turned on Automatic communication operation sta
90. io User free area 0 RW x ee 24575 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 4 1 MODBUS Standard Function Support List 1 MODBUS standard function support list The following table indicates a list of the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 Function Code Function Processing Reference Sub Code Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more coils Section 4 3 1 Read discrete inputs Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more inputs Section 4 3 2 03 Read holding registers Reads the values of one or more holding registers Section 4 3 3 Read input registers Reads the values of one or more input registers Section 4 3 4 04 Write single coil Writes a value ON OFF to one coil Section 4 3 5 06 Write single register Writes a value to one holding register Section 4 3 6 07 x1 2 Read exception status Reads error statuses indicated by eight coils F Executes various diagnostics 08 1 x2 Diagnostics The diagnostics results are returned to the master Get communications event OE 11 1 2 Gets the communication event counter counter Writes values ON OFF to multiple coils Section 4 3 7 21 6 Masks the value stored in one holding register with AND or 3 22 Mask write register f Section 4 3 11 OR and writes a value Reads and writes values from
91. name ou7iMT31 Module implementation status Start 1 0 No Module model name Monitor Test Select the module to be monitored tested Monitor Test screen Monitor Test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MTS1 Setting item Current value Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 Operation mede setting status Switch 2 Communication condition setting status Basic parameter starting method MODBUSIR device assignment parameter starting method Online change enable disable Send frame specificaton Switch 3 4 Local station IP address setting status 192 1 0 254 Module READY Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Refer to Section 8 6 MELSEC Q 8 10 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 3 3 Starting the Intelligent function module utility Operating procedure Intelligent function module utility is started from GX Developer Tools gt Intelligent function utility Start Setting Screen Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW QJ EBR Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 MODBUSIR Module Module model name QJ71MTS1
92. number Head coil number 0 Assignment points 012191 065000 065004 065536 Holding register 400001 pss 465536 Device code Head device number Head coil number Assignment points Holding register assignment 1 Device code Head device number Head holding register number Assignment points Head holding register number Device code Head device number Head holding register number Assignment points 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 1 MODBUS device sizes The MODBUS devices available for the QJ71MT91 are given in the following table MODBUS Device Type Read Write MODBUS Device Number Read Write 65536 points 000001 to 065536 65536 points 100001 to 165536 65536 points 300001 to 365536 Holding register Read Write 65536 points 400001 to 465536 File number 0 to 418 2 Extended file register 1 4184064 points 2 600000 to 609999 1 The availability of extended file register read write depends on that of the file register ZR read write to the programmable controller CPU For example if the file register ZR is stored on a Flash card the extended file register is read only because the file register ZR is read only For details refer to the QCPU user s manual explanation program fundamentals 2 The maximum access points and maximum file number of the extended file
93. online change COM ERR disable status Online change error incorrect j Review the specified data of the The write device data size of i f write device data size and byte Received data the received request COM ERR count on the master side from size error message does not match the which the request message specified byte count was sent message was sent Continued on next page 11 31 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error COM ERR 7396H 11 32 Slave function busy System error PING test setting error The QJ71MT91 received request messages that exceed the number of simultaneously receivable request messages 64 The OS of the QJ71MT91 detected error The settings communication time check transmission count IP address of the PING test are incorrect COM ERR COM ERR Retry after a little while on the master side from which the request message was sent Counter the problem in the following procedure Check whether or not the QJ71MT91 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit Check whether or not the operating environment of the System is within the range of general specifications of the CPU module Check whether the power capacity is sufficient or not Check the QJ71MT91 CPU module and base unit to see if the hardware is normal according to the manual of each module If the module is faulty please consult y
94. refer to Section 11 3 3 b If the basic parameter setting request Y1 is turned ON during execution of the PING test the PING test results in error completion c If the PING test is executed with the basic parameter setting request Y1 ON the PING test results in error completion 11 49 11 49 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Program example An example of the PING test performed with a sequence program is given below a System configuration MOBDBUS TCP QJ71MT91 Slave device Master 192 1 0 1 rax 08g ana 078 Ethernet 0 1 The QJ71MT91 is mounted on Slot 0 of the base unit and the head I O No is 0 b Program conditions This program executes a PING test when PING test execution request Y1C is turned on after the PING test conditions are set 1 PING test condition settings Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value 2 Communication time check OFEOn 4064 S 4 Transmission count OFE1u 4065 4 times C0010001H IP address OFE2u to OFE3x 4066 to 4067 192 1 0 1 2 Devices available for user Application Module READY Input Basic parameter setting existence QJ71MT91 input output PING test completed Output PING test execution request External input command PING test execution command D10000 For getting execution result i D10001 For getting total packet transmission count Data register D10002 For get
95. request is MODBUS device on the COM ERR greater than the maximum master side from which the access points of the request message was sent corresponding function The write points of the Review the specified data of the Byte count received request message DOUERR write points and byte count on specification error does not match the specified the master side from which the byte count request message was sent The reference number value Review the specified reference Reference type specified in the received CO ERR number value on the master error request message FC 20 side from which the request FC 21 is incorrect message was sent The contents of the data unit in the received request mesage ae incorrect Review the contents of the The size of the received f request message on the master Data unit error request message is smaller COM ERR an side from which the request than the minimum size or greater than the maximum message was sent size required for the relevant function code While online change is disabled do not issue a write request message Turn ON b2 of the intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting to enable the online change The contents of the MBAP Review the contents of the MBAP header header in the received request message on the master COM ERR error request message are side from which the request A write request message was received in an
96. router 3 One default router and a maximum of any eight routers can be set for the router relay function b Subnet mask pattern 1 Set the subnet mask 1 Setting range C0000000u to FFFFFFFCH Consult the network administrator for the setting 2 When not using the subnet mask set any of the following table values according to the class Class Mask value Class A FF000000n Class B FFFFOOOOH Class C FFFFFFOOH 1 Networks constructed by Ethernet include small scaled network systems where multiple devices are connected to one Ethernet and medium and large scaled network systems where multiple small scaled networks are connected by routers etc The subnet mask logically divides one network where many devices are connected into multiple sub networks to facilitate administration Example Class B p Network address 01H IP address oJojojo ojo 1 ojojo o oj1jo 1 ojo 1 oj1 1 1 1 0jo o ojojo o t 00H ak lolo lololo Tolo Toto To Subnet address Host address Subnet mask 01H emn o 05 2r OM o o oJoJo o 1 o o o o o 1 o 1 o o 1 o 1 1 1 1 o o o o o o o 1 IP address 1 All devices on the same sub network must have common subnet masks 2 When not administrated by the sub network the connected devices need not have subnet masks Set the network address of the corresponding class 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q c Default
97. setting of GX Developer set Switch 1 to 000Du to select the hardware test mode Refer to Section 6 6 3 Reset the programmable controller CPU Test start e After 5 seconds check the status of each Normal e LED Emr e When the hardware test is completed change the operation mode to Online or another mode in the intelligent function module switch setting 6 jResettheprogrammableconmolerCPU ON C orFF x A possible cause of error is the RAM ROM fault of the QJ71MT91 When an error occurs the error code is stored into the error log area address CFEu to DFFu of the buffer memory in the QJ71MT91 Using GX Developer confirm the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 11 2 and 11 3 When the hardware test results in an error check the mounting status of the module and run the test again If the error occurs again its possible cause is the hardware fault of the QJ71MT91 Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 5 2 Self loopback test This section explains the self loopback test conducted to check the QJ71MT91 hardware including the send receive circuits The procedure for the self loopback test is shown below This test is run for about 5 seconds The test result can be checked with the LEDs on the front of the QJ71MT91 LED Status Ste Operation RUN OPEN ERR
98. settings is incorrect switch 5 When the redundant settings are not to be used delete the setting of the intelligent function module switch 5 It is a QJ71MT91 hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative It is a QJ71MT91 programmable controller CPU or base unit failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative When using the default Parameter setting using GX parameter setting delete the Configurator MB was made to QJ71MT91 parameters set to the programmable controller the programmable controller Parameter CPU while bO b1 of the CPU starting intelligent function module COM ERR When starting the QJ71MT91 method error Switch 2 communication with user setting parameters set condition setting was preset to from GX Configurator MB or Switch 5 error An error was detected by the ROM check made at power on ROM check error RAM check An error was detected by the error RAM check made at power on Start with the default sequence program turn ON bO parameters b1 of the intelligent function module switch 2 Continued on next page 11 23 11 23 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error di Error Name Description Code After power on with parameters preset by GX Configurator MB before Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns on parameter settings were done by any of the following Lit LED Corrective Action When using parameters set by G
99. the COM ERR LED 2 in the figure COM ERR LED OFF request Y1B LED OFF LED ON ON 1 COM ERR LED status X1B Error occurrence Error occurrence Error occurrence b While the COM ERR LED OFF request Y1B is ON OFF request processing is performed continuously 3 in the figure c The error information in the error log area of the buffer memory is not cleared erased by turning ON the COM ERR LED OFF request Y 1B 2 Program conditions In this program COM ERR LED OFF request Y1B is turned on to turn off the COM ERR LED Device Name Application X0 Module READY Input QJ71MT91 input output E xt coM ERR LED status Output v com ERR LED OFF request External input command 0 com ERR LED OFF command 3 Program example X20 X0 XIB SET Y1B COM ERR LED COM ERR Module COM ERR COM ERR OFF request LED OFF READY LED status LED OFF command request YIB COM ERR LED COM ERR COM ERR OFF completed LED status od request M Fn 11 43 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 Conducting PING Test to Check QJ71MT91 Connection Address OFEO 4064 OFE2 to OFE3H 4066 to 4067 This section explains how to conduct a PING test in the QJ71MT91 Method Reference Section From GX Configurator MB Section 11 5 1 From sequence program 1 PING test Section 11 5 2 MELSEC Q a A PING test checks whether the other
100. the QJ71MT91 checks the target device for existence and cuts off unnecessary TCP connections Exchanges data with the device connected to other Ethernet via router s and or gateway s This is not a function with which the QJ71MT91 operates as a router Allows connection with the device that uses the IEEE802 3 frame A network can be configured in a redundant system Allows connection of up to eight GX Developers via the QJ71MT91 Checks the operations of the QJ71MT91 and send receive functions Tests the RAM and ROM of the QJ71MT91 Tests the send receive functions and hardware of the QJ71MT91 MELSEC Q Section 5 2 1 Chapter 10 Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 2 Section 5 4 Section 5 5 Section 6 6 Section 5 6 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Use of the utility package GX Configurator MB allows easy parameter settings the basic parameters and Various settings using utility package E Chapter 8 automatic communication parameters and status monitoring X Dedicated instructions are not available when the QJ71MT91 is installed to a MELSECNET H remote I O station or a redundant system x2 When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station there is a restriction on the function code supported by the automatic response function Refer to Section 4 1 for details x3 When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station there is a restr
101. this occurs close the Intelligent function module utility GX Developer program comments etc and other applications and then start GX Developer and Intelligent function module utility again To start the Intelligent function module utility a In GX Developer select QCPU Q mode for PLC series and specify a project If any PLC series other than QCPU Q mode is selected or if no project is specified the Intelligent function module utility will not start b Multiple Intelligent function module utilities can be started However Open parameters and Save parameters operations under Intelligent function module parameter are allowed for one Intelligent function module utility only Only the Monitor test operation is allowed for the other utilities Switching between two or more Intelligent function module utilities When two or more Intelligent function module utility screens cannot be displayed side by side select a screen to be displayed on the top of others using the task bar 74 Start gt MELSOFT series GX D 7 Intelligent Function m Z2 Intelligent function m 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 6 Number of parameters that can be set in GX Configurator MB When multiple intelligent function modules are mounted the number of parameter settings must not exceed the following limit When intelligent function modules are installed to 1024 Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UDH Q10UDH Q13UDH Q20UD
102. 014 Set the automatic communication parameters in the online mode intelligent function module switch 1 0000n 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 1 3 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting method 2 Make MODBUS device assignment parameter setting in the following 1 Store the parameters into the MODBUS device assignment parameter area address 0900H to O9FFu of the buffer memory 2 Tum ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 I O signals for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Use the following I O signals for MODBUS device assignment parameter Signal Name Module READY ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed ON Normally completed OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request ON Being requested OFF Not requested 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Timing charts for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a When setting is completed normally MODBUS device assignment parameter H setting normally 1 completed MODBUS device assignment parameter creation
103. 020BH 523 n MODBUS device head number Access CENE Automatic communication f EN 020Cu to O4FFH Same as in automatic communication parameter 1 parameter 2 to 524 to 1279 64 After the automatic communication parameters have been written to the programmable controller CPU the automatic communication function is operated when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 7 3 MODBUS device assignment parameters Purpose Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters on the MODBUS device assignment parameter screen Operating procedure Initial setting screen MODBUS R device assignment Setting screen MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 Setting item Coil assignment 1 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 2 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 3 Device Details Device input Make text file End setup Cancel 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q Setting items For the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting set the data format or setting ran
104. 1 I 11 17 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 7 Automatic communication function error code storage area a When an error occurs in the automatic communication function the error code corresponding to the automatic communication parameter 1 to 64 is stored in this area b When the automatic communication function operation status bit turns ON the error code is stored into the corresponding area c The automatic communication function error code storage area is not cleared The error code is overwritten when a new error occurs 8 Error log area a Up to 32 latest errors are stored into the error log area as an error history Error Log Area Name Number of errors occurred Error log write pointer Em f 3327 E 0D01H Exception code hoes Error log 1 En ODO3H Local station port No 3331 ODO4nu to ODO5H LOTO IP address 3332 to 3333 ODO6H 3334 ODO8x to ODFFH 3336 to 3583 ee device port No Error Eroriog2to32 as inerorlogt 2 to 32 as in error log 1 b Number of errors occurred 1 The number of errors entered into the error log is stored 2 If65536 or more errors have occurred the count stops at FFFFH 65535 c Error log write pointer The number of the latest error log is stored 0 No error no entry of error log 1 to 32 Error long number where the latest error log is entered 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q d Error log error log 1 to 32
105. 1 Initial Value 0111u 273 Target slave port No for automatic communication function 1 to 655356 0114H 276 CPU response monitoring timer value Set time set value X 500ms 1 to 2400 10 0115H to 0116H 277 to 278 0117H 279 IP address Refer to Section 7 2 4 4 b 00000000 Preferred node specification 1 Number of connections 0 to 64 0118H to 01D4H 280 to 468 Preferred node specification 2 to 64 Same as Preferred node specification 1 1 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 2 2 TCP UDP IP setting 1 TCP UDP IP monitoring timer a TCP ULP timer value 1 Set the ACK monitoring time for opening TCP connection and sending data If no ACK has been received from the target device for a predetermined period of time the connection is forcibly closed 2 No setting is required when the default value is used b TCP zero window timer value 1 The window indicates the receive buffer on the receiving side 2 When the receive buffer on the receiving side becomes full window size 0 data transmission is held until the receive buffer has free space In such a case the sender sends a window check packet to the receiver according to the TCP zero window timer value to check whether data can be received or not 3 No setting is required when
106. 10Mbps or not connected RD Receive status Data receive in progress Data not yet received 1 For troubleshooting refer to Section 11 1 x2 When the COM ERR LED has turned off refer to Section 11 4 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 4 Connection to Ethernet This section explains how to connect the QJ71MT91 to the 100BASE TX or 10BASE T network 1 Connection precautions The following are the precautions for connection of the QJ71MT91 Handle the QJ71MT91 correctly paying full attention to safety AN CAUTION Sufficient safety measures must be taken for 100BASE TX or 10BASE T installation work Consult a specialist when connecting cable terminals or installing trunk line cables etc e Use the connection cable which complies with the corresponding standard given in Section 3 1 e Do not install the control and communication cables together with the main circuit and power cables etc Keep a distance of at least 100mm between them Failure to do so can cause a malfunction due to noise e The communication and power cables connected to the module must be placed in a duct or secured with clamps If the cables are not secured inadvertent tripping can cause damage to the module or cables or a malfunction e When disconnecting any of the communication and power cables connected to the module do not pull it by holding the cable part Disconnect the cable by holding the connector connected to the module
107. 11 3 1 0C28u to OC67H Automatic communication error code storage area 3112 to 3175 E 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 1 To test the automatic communication start request or automatic communication stop request select the corresponding item in the Setting value column and click the Execute test button POINT When conducting a test on the automatic communication start request or automatic communication stop request with Being requested set in the Setting value column make sure that Not requested is displayed in the Current value column When the current value is Being requested the test for Being requested setting cannot be performed If the current value is Being requested change it to Not requested and start the test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 4 Error log Monitor Purpose Display the errors that occurred in the QJ71MT91 Error logs are displayed in reverse chronological order the latest error is displayed as No 1 For details of the monitoring items refer to Section 11 3 1 8 b Number of error occurred and d Error log error log 1 to 32 Operating procedure Monitor Test screen Error log Monitor Screen Error log Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Statl ONo 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value The error log is displayed in order o
108. 2 turned on Refer to Automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 turned on 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q No Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action 3 Section 3 COM ERR LED Check if the MODBUS device Refer to MODBUS device assignment f This section 2 6 assignment parameter setting error parameter setting error completed X9 completed X9 is on turned on Check if the automatic communication Refer to the automatic communication error status X7 is on operation status storage area DC20nu to 0C234 identify the parameter number where the error occurred confirm the error code stored in the corresponding automatic communication error code SCIES storage area 0C28u to 0C674 or the exception code from the target slave and take corrective action Turn off the COM ERR LED When the dedicated instruction is used Refer to Dedicated instruction failed This section check it for an error Turn off the COM ERR LED 3 2 Check the error code in the error log Take the corresponding corrective action Section 11 3 Turn off the COM ERR LED Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 3 6 INIT LED does Check the basic parameter setting Set the basic parameters from GX Chapter 7 not turn on Configurator MB or from the sequence Chapter 8 Section 9 1 1 In the setting of
109. 24 C0010002H Target station IP address 020Cu to 020D 524 to 525 192 1 0 2 Module ID 020En 526 255 Repeat interval timer value 020Fu 527 10 100ms Response monitoring timer value 02104 528 60 30s Tn Type specification of the target 0005u communication 02114 529 MODBUS device Write holding registers parameter 2 Head buffer memory 02154 533 3A00H address Write setting Target MODBUS 0216H 534 0 device head number 02174 535 100 c MODBUS device assignment parameters Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value 009Du Device code 0900u 2304 Y Output Coil assignment 1 Head device number 09014 2305 0100H Head coil number 0902u 2306 0 000001 Assignment points 0903u 2307 512 points 00A8u D Data register Automatic Automatic Device code 0980u 2432 Input regist PERE TEISE Head device number 09814 2433 3500 assignment 1 Head input register number 0982u 2434 3499 303500 Assignment points 0983u 2435 5500 points FOOOH Device code 09COu 2496 User free area Holding register 3 Head device number 09C1H 2497 5500H assignment 1 Head holding register number 09C2u 2498 0 400001 Assignment points 09C3u 2499 1024 points 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Devices used in program Application Module READY Basic parameter setting normally completed X2 Basic parameter setting error completed Basic parameter setting existenc
110. 2u to OFE3H IP address ne to 4067 Section 11 5 awe test execution PING test execution request w UNES LR E E E CN E CN E X E X 8E 3 8E 3 Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 7 Parameter Setting Using GX Configurator MB 8 7 1 Basic parameters Purpose Set the basic parameters on the basic parameter screen Operating procedure Initial setting screen Basic parameter Setting screen Basic parameter Module information Module type MODBLIS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 TCP ULP timer value Units 500ms TCP zero window timer value Units 500ms TCP resend timer value Units 500ms TCP end timer value Units 500ms IP reassembly timer value Units 500ms Split reception monitoring timer value Units 500ms Keep live Details Decimal input Setting range 2 2400 Make text file End setup Cancel MELSEC Q 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q Setting items For the basic parameter setting set the data format or setting range value of each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save the set values Buffer memory Reference Setting Item address section 0000H TCP ULP timer value 0 0001 1 00024 2 0003H 3 00041 4 0005 TCP zero window timer value TC
111. 3 for details of the automatic communication parameters Start and stop of automatic communication function a When the automatic communication parameters are set from the utility package GX Configurator MB the automatic communication function is activated by powering ON the programmable controller from OFF or by resetting the programmable controller CPU with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN The automatic communication will not start if the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or if the programmable controller CPU is reset with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP switch set to STOP If the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the automatic communication function is activated when the remote I O station receives the information notifying the status change from STOP to RUN of the remote master station s programmable controller CPU Setting the automatic communication parameters from GX Configurator MB eliminates the need of a sequence program for start 5 3 5 FUNCTIONS Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Automatic communication stop request Automatic communication operation status b c d Parameter creation Module READY Basic parameter setting existence
112. 33MHz or more 32MB or more Windows Me Pentium 150MHz or more 32MB or more 1GB or more 32 bit version Windows 7 Pentium 1GHz or more 2GB or more 64 bit version The following functions cannot be used when the computer is running under Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 This product may not perform properly when these functions are used Activating the application with Windows compatible mode Simplified user switch over Remote desktop Large font size Advanced setting of Display Properties DPI setting other than 10096 64 bit version 1 Windows XP Mode Windows Touch 4 Supported by Windows 7 Use the product as a user having a privilege higher than USER for Microsoft Windows Vista 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 3 Utility Package Operation 8 3 1 Common utility package operations 1 Control keys Special keys that can be used for operation of the utility package and their applications are shown in the table below Application Cancels the current entry in a cell za Closes the window Moves between controls in the window Used in combination with the mouse operation to select multiple cells for test execution Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned When a cell is selected clears all of the setting contents in the cell Back Space Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned Moves the cursor one page down Completes the entr
113. 4 Read input registers FC 04 edet reiten esa tea d ha beoe dna ena 4 9 4 3 5 Write single coil FC 05 ccecccesccesecesccesccessceseceeceesceesacesectsaceseeesceeseceucensceesecesecteeeseeeneeeseeteaeetaetaes 4 10 4 3 6 Write single register FC 06 eite rete ede teneo due Lee de Led Lr de Ee ca 4 11 4 3 7 Write multiple coils FC 15 rennen nennen nnne nnns 4 12 A 8 A 8 4 3 8 Write multiple registers FC 16 nennen nennen nennen nnne 4 14 4 3 9 Read file record FC 20 SC 06 essen censere AEA ERARA R EES 4 15 4 3 10 Write file record FC 21 SC 06 nennen nennen nre nnne nnne nnne 4 17 4 3 11 Mask write register FC 22 osinkona enne ne senec a dnd atn dn dne dn an dns 4 19 4 3 12 Read Write multiple registers FC 23 nennen nennen 4 20 OV EUDCHOD EISE I norton E ut La a a e a n 5 1 5 2 Master F nctlol nie Re ne incer ne ER EE pe te UE De dL p E dE Eee aaa e P ERU a 5 3 5 2 1 Automatic communication function essen rennes 5 3 5 2 2 Dedicated instructions edente enhn tene tnnt there ARAE E tne dene en eite tnn netten 5 9 5 3 Slave EUnctiorniz cui tete ei eeu dum ue Rb dee ui de eer dne 5 10 5 3 1 Automatic response function sessssssssssssssssssssseeeee nennen nennen nnne nnne 5 10 5 3 2 MODBUS device assignment function sensensa nennen nennen nnne neni 5 11 5 4 KeepAlive Function
114. 49 s J Router relay function 000Ad 10 0 Not used 0008H 8 0009H 9 000Bu to 000C 11 to 12 Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address 000Du to O00Eu 13 to 14 60 30s 1 Used 1200 600s 20 10s 3 FFFFFFOOH 255 255 255 0 00000000H 0 0 0 0 Number of routers set OOOFH 15 0 Subnet address 0010H to 0011H 16 to 17 Router IP address 0012u to 0013u 18 to 19 Number of TCP connectors for GX 00304 48 Developer connection 00000000H 0 0 0 0 00000000H 0 0 0 0 Local slave station port No 01104 272 Target slave port No for automatic 01114 273 communication function CPU response monitoring timer value Preferred node IP address 0115H to 01164 277 to 278 specification 1 1 502 502 0114n 276 10 C0010002u 192 1 0 2 Number of connections 01174 279 2 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Automatic communication parameters Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value C0010002H 192 1 0 2 Target station IP address 0200u to 0201u 512 to 513 ModlelD ID 0202u 514 Repeat interval timer value 02034 515 mE Response monitoring timer value 02044 516 60 30s lt n Type specification of the target 0100H communication 0205n 517 MODBUS device Read coils parameter 1 Head buffer memory 0206 518 1100H address Read setting Target MODBUS 0207H 519 15000 eae head number Access Access points 0208H 02084020 104 10
115. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Led cries MODBUS TCP Interface Module User s Manual QJ71MT91 GX Configurator MB SW1D5C QMBU E e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and A CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions l l l resulting in death or severe injury N CAUTION I I I I Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage I J Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under NCAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING e When controlling a running programmable controller modifying data by c
116. 9 Y 609999 ZR30000 p zm ZR4179999 ZR4180000 600000 4064 File No 418 ZR4184063 604063 2 Out of bounds read write request The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response when the master makes a request to the programmable controller CPU on the QJ71MT91 mounted station to read from or write to a nonexistent file register ZR For the file register ZR refer to the QCPU user s manual explanation program fundamentals 3 MODBUS extended file register size The MODBUS extended file register size depends on the file register ZR size set to the programmable controller CPU on the QJ71MT91 mounted station For details refer to the QCPU user s manual explanation program fundamentals POINT Even if the slave QJ71MT91 receives Write File Record FC 21 when the programmable controller CPU s file register ZR is read only for example when stored on a Flash card it will issue a normal response In this case however the action for Write File Record is not performed To write to the extended file register check that the programmable controller CPU s file register ZR is writable or not in advance 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 5 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment 1 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment The QJ71MT91 can assign the MODBUS devices to the QJ71MT91 buffer memory By making this assignment access to the MODBUS devices will not be influenced by the sequence scan This enables the Q
117. 91 QJ71MT91 MODBUSS TCP slave device 192 1 0 5 192 1 0 6 192 1 0 2 x1 This QJ71MT91 is assumed to be mounted in Slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 0 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q a Automatic communication function The setting target QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 and MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 communicate with each other using the automatic communication function Set automatic communication parameters to the setting target QJ71MT91 Communication details Master Slave Slave Programmable controller CPU Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data Output data QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Automatic communication function buffer input area 1100 Hf Input data 4352 64 words 1024 bits Automatic communication function buffer output area Output data 100 words 3FFFA 16383 MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 Coil Bit register 000001 015001 Input data 1024 points 64 words 065536 MODBUS protocol 400001 Holding register Word register Output data 100 points 100 words 465536 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b MODBUS device assignment function The setting target QJ71MT91
118. Appendix 4 Japanese Manual Version SH NA 080445 J This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series programmable controller Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series programmable controller you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PREGAU TIONS 2 2 1 x a ie tn ae aaa eth A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Grn nennen nnne nnne nnne nennen enne A 5 REVISIONS ccm A 6 INTRODUCTION 5 rete eta e e eau A 8 oon agp A A 8 COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES eene A 12 THE MANUAL S USAGE AND STRUCTURE sese nne nnne nnn nnne nnne A 12 ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS sese A 14 MEANINGS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERWMS sess nre nre nre nre nnne A 15 PRODUCT CONFIGURAT ON ssesseseseeeeeeeennenee nennen tret rennen rennen a rennen enne A 15 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to 1 5 1 1 Features E 1 1
119. Automatic comm error status D4092 1 AE ST M401 NI M402 N2 K72 Y40 D9100 YA D9101 Y40 D4000 0 YA D4000 1 END J When automatic communication parameter 1 is normal When automatic communication parameter 2 is normal Acquires automatic communication operation status and automatic communication error code at automatic communication error Turns ON External output Y40 when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Turns ON External output Y41 when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Turns OFF External output Y40 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 Turns OFF External output Y41 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 MELSEC Q 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 2 3 Program without using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking Switch setting on lt lt I O assignment of GX Developer For the program example set intelligent function module switches as described be
120. BUS Device Device Device i Classification Device Name Symbol Code 5 j os Jojloj i Special register soes ow of Of input 1 par cones 5 JG In opt veg ow jJo oj memdrey mes oc jJo oj L lacneay tL we Of ot Ammdatr F osm jJo oj Edge relay Link relay Data register OOA8H W 3 4 Link register e 00B4H 6 Input register Holding register Extended file register 00COH Internal user device Timer Contat TS oocm Currentvalue TN 00C2u Coil C Retentive Contact TS TN S on Counter OOA1H Link special register SW 3 00B5H Step relay 0098H Direct input Direct device Direct output Index register Index register z oco File register File register QJ71MT91 buffer memory DNR User free area C2 3 1 The device assigned to the extended file register is fixed to the file register ZR Refer to Section 7 4 4 for the extended file register 2 Refer to Section 7 4 5 for device assignment to the QJ71MT91 buffer memory 3 Only this device is supported when the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station An error will occur if an access request is received from the MODBUS TCP master with any other device assigned 4 Corresponds to LB and LW on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 5 When settin
121. CTIONS Function code Function code 14H 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Number of Number of Reference response read bytes number data bytes n1X2 1 06H mx2 Nx2 Sub request 1 Device data Device data n1 Number of read bytes n1X 2 1 MELSEC Q Number of response data bytes m X2 N X2 oe o Number of read bytes nmX2 1 Reference number 06H Sub request m Device data Number of read bytes nm X 2 1 Device data Number of response data bytes mx 2 NX 2 N in the above diagram represents the total n1 data When completed with an error Function code Function code 94u Exception code nm of the device When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 10 Write file record FC 21 SC 06 Writes values to one or more extended file registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 122 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Sub request 1 Function code Number of Reference File number Write head Write points Device data Device data n1 n1 0000H to 270FH 0001H to 007AH WV P Number of bytes m X 7 15H bytes nu
122. E85n 3716 to 3717 OE86H to OE87n 3718 to 3719 OE88nH to OE89H 3720 to 3721 TCP packet reception count Count of TCP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent TCP packets UDP packet reception count Count of UDP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent UDP packets Framing error count Overflow count CRC error count 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 6 PING test Monitor Test Purpose Display the execution and result of a PING test Refer to Section 11 5 for details Operating procedure Monitor Test screen PING test Monitor Test Screen PING test Module information Module type X MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value Communication time check Transmission count IP address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PING test execution request Not requested Being requested PING test completed OFF Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Decimal input Make text file Setting range 2 60 Stop monitor Execute test Monitor Test Items Monitor Test Item BENE Pema Relelenen address section OFEOuH Communication time check 4064 Transmission count E a j E CN OFE
123. Error device type assignment parameter setting l D9006 E R Error assigned group No result acquisition D9100 Automatic Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error Automatic communication parameter 2 Internal relay communication normal Continued on next page 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Application UOYGO to U0 G19 U0 G48 U0 G272 to U0 G273 U0 G276 to U01G279 U0 G512 to U0 G520 U0 G524 to U0 G529 U0 G533 to U0 G535 U0 G2304 to U0 G2307 U01G2432 to Intelligent function module U0 G2435 device U01G2496 to U01G2499 U0 G3088 Basic parameter error code storage area U0 G3089 Automatic communication parameter error code storage area U0 G3090 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area U0 G3091 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area U0 G3092 MODBUS device assignment Error device type U0 G3093 parameter setting result storage area Error assigned group No U01G3104 to ur t Automatic communication operation status storage area parameter 1 to 64 U01G3107 U0 G3112 to Uu Automatic communication error code storage area parameter 1 to 64 U0 G3175 U01G4096 to x Automatic communication function buffer input area U0 G8191 U0 G12288 to i Automatic communication function buffer output area U0 G 16383 Basic parameter setting area Automatic communication parameter setting area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area 9 PROGRAMMIN
124. Failure to do so can cause a malfunction or damage to the module or cable 2 Connection to 10BASE T 100BASE TX This section explains how to connect the QJ71MT91 to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX network A twisted pair cable connection diagram is shown below l 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q lt Operation procedures gt Step 1 Connect the twisted pair cable to the hub Step 2 Connect the twisted pair cable to the QJ71MT91 POINT 1 The QJ71MT91 detects whether 10BASE T or 100BASE TX and the full or half duplex communication mode is used according to the hub For connection with the hub that does not support the auto negotiation function set the half duplex communication mode on the hub side 2 Refer to Section 2 2 for the devices necessary for connection to 10BASE T 100BASE TX and a system configuration example 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 5 Unit Tests This section explains the unit tests conducted to check the send receive functions and hardware of the QJ71MT91 The unit tests can be run by changing the intelligent function module switch setting of the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 6 6 6 5 1 Hardware test The RAM and ROM of the QJ71MT91 are tested in the following steps The test result can be checked with the LEDs on the front of the QJ71MT91 Doo ENER Disconnect the network cable from the QJ71MT91 In the intelligent function module switch
125. G MELSEC Q 9 2 2 Program using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking Switch setting on lt lt I O assignment gt gt of GX Developer For the program example set intelligent function module switches as described below Intelligent Function f Setting Details Set Value Module Switch Switch 1 No need to set initial value online Basic parameter starting method Start with the user set parameters b0 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method i Start with the user set parameters b1 1 Switch 2 Online change enable disable setting Online change enabled b2 1 Send frame specification Data are sent in Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame b3 0 Switch 3 Set the upper half of the IP address C001H Switch 4 Set the lower half of the IP address 0001H Switch 5 No need to set 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters from the Initial setting screen of GX Configurator MB a Basic parameters Set the basic parameters on the Basic parameter screen Set the values shown in Section 9 2 1 2 a Basic parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Setting value TCP UDP IP setting TCP ULP timer value Units 500ms TCP zero window timer value Units 500ms TCP resend timer value Units 500ms TCP end timer va
126. H Q26UDH Q03UDE Q04UDEH QO6UDEH Q10UDEH Q13UDEH Q20UDEH Q26UDEHCPU CPU modules other than the above Not supported Not supported MELSECNET H remote I O station For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed to the MELSECNET H remote I O station configure the settings in GX Configurator so that the number of parameter settings for all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the limit of the MELSECNET H remote I O station Calculate the total number of parameter settings separately for the initial setting and for the auto refresh setting The number of parameters that can be set for one module in GX Configurator MB is as shown below Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting QJ71MT91 3 Fixed 5 Max Example Counting the number of parameter settings in Auto refresh setting SER Module information Modul MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Module side Module side Module side 7 ofa PLC side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset E Device word count it MODBUS is a registered trademark of 4096 4096 it oy Do Schneider Electric SA unication function buffer unication function buffer 4096 4096 o e p4096 This one row is counted as one unication operation status D D gt D8092 setting ser free area input 4095 4096 of gt Blank rows are not counted pose esas Io _ a s
127. HCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU MODBUS TCP MODBUS serial protocol Programmable controller CPU A generic term for the QO2CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU GX Works2 The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers Ethernet module The QJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module A machine specific address that is also referred to as the MAC Media Access Control address This is used to identify the addresses of external devices over a network The Ethernet address of the QJ71MT91 can be verified on the MAC ADD column of the rating plate Master The side from which a request is sent to execute a function The side where the execution request from the master is processed and its execution result is sent The function that allows communication with the MODBUS TCP compatible slave device as the master of MODBUS TCP The function that allows communication with the MODBUS TCP compatible master device as the slave of MODBUS TCP The message used to give a function execution request to the slave In the MODBUS protocol a function execution request is given from the master to the slave A function execution request cannot be given from the slave to the master Response message The message with which the slave returns a function execution result to the master A generic term f
128. HEX before entering the values 3 After setting write the data to the programmable controller and power the programmable controller OFF then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q Intelligent function module switch setting items Switch No Initial Value 1 in this Switch 1 Operation mode setting 0000H section 2 in this Switch 2 Communication condition setting 0000H section Switch 3 IP address setting high order ENS H 3 in this Switch 4 IP address setting low order O0FE amp section 2 4 in this Switch 5 Redundant settings 0400H section 1 The settings made with the intelligent function module switches become effective after power is switched OFF then ON or the programmable controller CPU is reset Setting change during operation is also not available 2 When the intelligent function module switch setting has not been made the initial values of each switch are used for operation For the operation method of GX Developer refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 1 Operation mode setting Switch 1 Set the operation mode of the QJ71MT91 such as the online or offline mode Normal operation mode Communicates with the target 0000 Online ue evice Disconnects the local station from the network In the offline mode parameter setting cannot be executed 0001u Offline ier f P Communication with the o
129. Input register assignment 2 to 16 Same as in input register assignment Same as in input register assignment 1 0 Devite code 0000 Device code not assigned Other than 0000 Device code Head device number 0000H to FFFFH Holding register en i t 1 assignmen Head holding register 00004 to FFEFH number proper MR points ewm to FFFFH Holdi t KAERA dd 46 Same as in Same as in holding register assignment register assignment 1 1 When the intelligent function switch 2 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Bit 1 setting is Start with the default parameters OFF the default assignment parameters are used The default parameter values are displayed on the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting screen of GX Configurator MB Refer to Section 7 4 3 for the default assignment parameters With the intelligent function module switch turn ON the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Refer to Section 6 6 If this switch is set to OFF the operation will proceed based on the default assignment parameters Refer to Section 7 4 3 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 1 Device codes a Set the device codes for the programmable controller CPU devices and QJ71MT91 buffer memory area assigned to the MODBUS devices b The device codes have different setting ranges depending on the MODBUS devices Refer to the following table for the device code setting ranges Assignable MOD
130. J71MT91 100 Coil assignment 1 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 2 Device Head coil number Specify Actual device No 1 Assignment points Coil assignment 3 Device Details Device input Setting range w Make text file End setup Cancel When the MODBUS device assignment parameter screen is displayed it shows the initial values Delete unnecessary initial values 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Auto refresh setting Make auto refresh setting from the Auto refresh setting screen of GX Configurator MB Set the following items for the program example Module side Module side PLC side Setting Item Transfer word count Buffer offset Device Automatic communication function buffer input area 256 100H D4096 Automatic communication function buffer output area 2560 A00u D5000 Automatic communication operation status NENNEN D4092 Auto refresh setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 PLC side Device Module side Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count Transfer direction MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operation status 1 to 64
131. J71MT91 to respond faster to the master 2 To assign the QJ71MT91 buffer memory to the MODBUS device a When using the MODBUS device assignment parameter When setting the MODBUS device assignment parameter set FOOOn for the device code Refer to Section 7 4 2 b When using the default assignment parameter Use any of the MODBUS device 422529 to 426624 Refer to Section 7 4 3 3 MODBUS device assignment range The following QJ71MT91 buffer memory addresses can be assigned to the MODBUS devices Buffer Memory Address Auto Refresh Setting 5000u to SFFFH 4096 Available Programmable controller CPU Sequence program unnecessary Device memory D300 QJ71MT91 Slave function MODBUS device assignment parameters MODBUS device 400498 400500 Creation of response message sent to master Request message holding register 400500 read request MODBUSG TCP master device Response message holding register 400500 1234n 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 1 The QJ71MT91 receives a holding register 400500 read request message from the master 2 The QJ71MT91 reads data from its own buffer memory according to the value set to the MODBUS device assignment parameter Faster processing is executed as access is not influenced by the sequence scan 3 The QJ71MT91 creates a response message and sends it to th
132. MELSEC Q Control data Setting Setting Device Item Set Data pa 2 Range Side b15 to b1 bO 0 to 0 1 1 Close option Bit O Execution type Set whether a TCP connection will be closed or not after instruction 0 1 User completion 0 TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 1 TCP connection is closed after instruction completion A condition when instruction is completed is stored sem 0 Normal completion Complete condition System Other than 0 Error completion error code Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error code An exception code from the slave is stored MODBUS 0 Slave processing normally completed exception code Other than 0 Slave processing completed with an error exception code System Refer to Section 11 3 2 for details of the exception code Set the IP address of the target slave IP address F 1 0 2 Target IP address d E Refer to 1 User b15 b8 b7 bO b15 b8 b7 bO lt S1 4 lt S1 3 gt Set when a request message is sent to the slave without the MODBUS TCP interface via the MODBUS serial gateway etc When the destination of the request message is the MODBUS serial gateway the set values are as described below Module ID 0 to 255 User 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 Station number of MODBUS serial slave Set 255 when the destination of the request message is the slave having the MODBUS TCP interface 0 Specify the port No of the target slave Targe
133. N 16 bits Request message storing head device User D1 Response message storing head device System Device turned ON one scan on completion of the instruction D2 System D2 1 also turns ON for error completion 2 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The programmable controller CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution The local device and program based file register are not available as the devices used for set data Refer to Section 4 2 for details of the PDU protocol data unit 10 11 10 11 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Control data Device Item Set Data Setting Setting Range Side a ey 5 0 oi 9 1 Close option Bit 0 Execution type Set whether a TCP connection will be closed or not after instruction User completion 0 TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 1 TCP connection is closed after instruction completion A condition when instruction is completed is stored 0 Normal completion Complete condition System P E Other than 0 Error completion error code i Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error code Fixed value 0o User Set the IP address of the target slave IP address Bs i Target IP address Refer to 1 User b15 b8 b7 b8 b7 lt S1 4 lt S1 3 gt Set when a request message is sent to the slave wit
134. OFF MODBUS device X8 IM E9999 T nsT Y8 MODBUS device parameter setting normally assignment parameter setting request Y8 when setting is completed normally completed X9 RST 8 Turns OFF MODBUS device MODBUS assignment parameter setting device request Y8 and stores error parameter code and parameter setting et result when setting fails completed UON MOVP 63091 D9004 UO R movP 63092 D9005 uoy MOVP 63093 D9006 9 PROGRAMMING lt lt Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer input area gt gt XO X6 H Module Automatic READY communication operation status UOV 64352 MOV D4096 lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt XO X6 U0163104 0 1 WF wc NI Automatic communication operation status Module READY Ni M401 L Program for normal automatic communication parameter 1 i MCR lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 2 gt gt X0 X6 UO G3104 1 MC N2 Module Automatic READY communication operation status N2__ M402 De hn ld ih tle aoe kil AMT 3 1 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 2 MCR lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt X0 X6 XI UON KJ 63104 D4000 Module Automatic Automatic READY comm comm operation error status status
135. ON Intelligent function module switch setting lt Switch 2 gt __ eee i111 MODBUS device assignment parameter Basic parameter starting method giantinoimeihod 1 Start with the user set parameters 1 Start with the user set parameters Communication starting conditions Default parameter Parameter setting setting not made processing by GX i Configurator MB QJ71MT91 operation Module READY X0 Basic parameter Y1 setting request Basic parameter setting normally X1 74 completed Basic parameter x3 H OFF existence MODBUS device assignment parameter Y8 setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence X8 Parameter setting operation XA rj Automatic communication function Master function lee mee he hme hn Ihn Ihr Ime mH Dedicated instruction fwsecseDeTU MEE gee gated A a UM Master function odes ntn Slave function F1 GX Developer connection Function executability 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 2 When sequence program is used for parameter setting a When the basic parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is OFF start with
136. P UDP IP TCP resend timer value monitoring timer TCP end timer value IP e timer value Spitrecepton montoring nerve reception monitoring timer value ae add 3 KeepAlive us 7 0008H 8 0009H 9 000An 10 000BH to 000CH 11 to 12 000Du to 000EH 13 to 14 000FH 15 TCP UDP IP setting KeopAie sit tmervae 0 start timer value UV interval timer value Section 7 2 T resend count Router Remake function Subnet mask pattern Routing Default router IP address information Number of routers set Router information 1 to 8 0010u to 002FH 16 to 47 Subnet address Router IP address 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q A Buffer memory Reference Setting Item address section Section 7 2 0111H Target slave port No for automatic communication 273 0110H Local slave station port No 272 function TCP UDP MODBUS 0114 IP setting TCP setting CPU response monitoring timer value nas Preferred node specification 1 to 64 0115H to 01D4u IP address 277 to 468 Number of connections 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 7 2 Automatic communication parameters Purpose Set the automatic communication parameters on the Automatic communication parameter screen Operating procedure Initial setting screen Automatic communication parameter Setting screen Automatic communication parameter Module inf
137. Parameter Setting Items Buffer Memory m Assignment Name Address Device code Head device Head MODBUS Assignment Device symbol number device number 1 points Coil assignment 1 0900H to 0903H 009DH Y 0000H o ag Coil assignment 2 0904H to 0907H 0090H M 0000H 8192 8192 Coil assignment 3 0908H to 090BH 0091H SM 0000H 20480 2048 V Coil assignment 4 090ChH to O90FH 0092H L 0000H 22528 8192 Coil assignment 5 0910H to 0913H 00A0H B 0000H 30720 8192 F Coil assignment 16 093CH to 093FH 0000H 0000H Input assignment 1 0940H to 0943H 009CH X 0000H Coil assignment 6 0914H to 0917H 0093H 0000H 38912 2048 8192 Input register assignment 1 to 16 0980H to 09BFH 0000H 0000H Holding register assignment 1 09C0H to 09C3H 00A8H D 0000H Holding register assignment 2 09C4H to 09C7H 00A9H SD 0000H 20480 2048 Input assignment 2 to 16 0944H to 097FH 0000H 0000H BENE NE o ing regi i o 12288 Holding register assignment 3 09C8H to 09CBH FOOOH 5000H 22528 4096 Holding register assignment 4 09CCH to O9CFH 00B4H W 0000H 30720 8192 Holding register assignment 5 09DOH to 09D3H 00B5H SW 0000H 40960 2048 Holding register assignment 6 09D4H to 09D7H 00C2H TN 0000H 53248 2048 Holding register assignment 7 09D8H to 09DBH 00C8H SN 0000H 57344 2048 Holding register assignment 8 O9DCH to O9DFH 00C5H CN 0000H 61440 2048 Holding register assignment 9 to 16 O9EOH to O9FFH 0000H
138. QJ71MT91 Repeat i interval timer i 1 y Response Request Response Request Response message message message message message Y Y MODBUSS TCP slave device message message message message Enlarged Automatic communication function communication time 5 H QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 Request Target slave device processing Response QJ71MT91 pata a SNR PC NN processing message time Ts message processing time i sending time sending time time i Uu i l 1 1 1 1 l Start End 1 Start ee A A interval timer j i H 1 1 Processing Request message Response Processing message time 7 S n se P 2 S yer 2 1 I 1 a 1 1 MODBUSSJ TCP Response Request Processing Response Slave device message message time message App 3 App MELSEC Q 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q b Dedicated instruction performance MBRW MBREQ instruction 1 Dedicated instruction processing time Unit ms The dedicated instruction processing time is the time from when the dedicated instruction is started until the completed device turns on Trc 7 St Stor Ts whichever is greater 2 Calculation items Setting Item Dedicated instruction processing time St Local station scan time Message proces
139. S AND SETTING MELSEC Q 1 If parameters are set at the GX Configurator MB power OFF and then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU with the CPU RUN STOP switch set at RUN IMPORTANT 1 When setting parameters do not write any data to the System area use prohibited among the QJ71MT91 buffer memory addresses Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 2 When making any parameter setting request etc do not output turn ON the Use prohibited signal among the output signals Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system 3 When having replaced the QJ71MT91 reset the other device of communication target If the device holds the Ethernet address of the communication target communication may not be continued since the Ethernet address is changed by the replacement of the QJ71MT91 Similarly after replacing the target device personal computer etc redo the QJ71MT91 basic parameter setting or restart the QJ71MT91 1 Use GX Developer to make I O assignment and intelligent function module Switch setting Use GX Configurator MB or sequence programs to set the basic parameters refer to Section 7 2 automatic communication parameters refer to Section 7 3 etc of the QJ71MT91 2 To update the parameter settings added changed on GX Developer write the parameters to the programmable controller CPU and then reset the programmable controller CPU 6 PRE OPERA
140. Section Monitor Test screen of GX Configurator MB This section 1 System monitor screen of GX Developer This section 2 1 Monitoring testing from GX Configurator MB GX Configurator MB has a Monitor Test screen for the status display and test of the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 8 6 for the Monitor Test screen 2 System monitor of GX Developer The module status of the QJ71MT91 can be confirmed from the system monitor a When confirming the module status and error code on the Module s Detailed Information screen of the diagnostic function Starting Procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information Module s Detailed Information r Module Module Name BJ71MTS1 Product information 120320000000000 B 120 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot r Module Information Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Fuse Status Noise Filter Setting Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Input Type Remote password setting status Error Display Display format No Error Code Present Error 7301 1 7301 HEX C DEC Error History The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Error contents Disposal Contents Switch 1 error The setting of the intelligent function module switch 1 operation mode setting is incorrect Disposal Review the setting of the intel
141. Subnet address set 1 81 O4 value 1 lolololololol lololololol lolol olololololololololololololololo Setting example 2 When the classes of the local station QJ71MT91 and target device differ Network address Local station QJ71MT91 IP address Class B Target device 2 IP address Class A 71H 04H H 01H ol l l lo lo o l o lo lo o o lo olo lo o o o o olo o o o o o o 1 Set the network address of the target device 2 Network address Subnet address set value 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Setting example 3 When the network addresses of the local station QJ71MT91 and target device are the same Network address peo ee Local station QJ71MT91 81s 054 IP address Class B 4 o jo ojoJo o 1 o ojojo oj1 o 1 ojo 1 o 1 1 1 1 ojojo ojo jO O t Subnet mask Target device 3 81H 05x 29H 02H IP address Class B 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 110 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 V Set the subnet address of the target device 3 Subnet address Subnet address set value f Router information Router IP address Set the IP addresses of the routers to be used when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target devices on other Ethernets via other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condit
142. T91 used as the MODBUS TCP master Is the Gratuitous ARP disabled in a security software setting ARP spoofing measures on the MODBUS TCP master side Remove the cause of the system switching failure in the standby system CPU module Change the parameter and program to the backup mode and write them to the Redundant CPU Increase a timeout occurrence time to an acceptable value as a system Use the fixed IP mode when using the QJ71MT91 as the MODBUS TCP master The redundant IP mode cannot be used Check if the MODBUS TCP master device supports the Gratuitous ARP Review the security software settings on the MODBUS TCP master side Use the fixed IP mode 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Dedicated instruction is not executed Complete device D2 does not turn on 2 Dedicated instruction failed 11 7 MELSEC Q Troubleshooting for other symptoms Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Check if the dedicated instruction is Start the dedicated instruction EE active Check whether the programmable RUN the programmable controller CPU controller CPU is in the RUN status or not While the dedicated instruction is Retry after the dedicated instruction is executed the related starting contact completed was turned on When a starting contact is turned on with the related dedicated instruction being executed the start instruction is ignored
143. TIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 3 Part Names This section indicates the names of the QJ71MT91 parts QJ71MTO91 RUN ERR 1 INIT COM ERR P OPEN 100M sD RD 10BASE T 100BASE TX 2 QJTIMT91 Name O Description Indicator LEDs Refer to the following section 1 Indications of indicator LEDs Connector for connection of the QJ71MT91 to 10BASE 10BASE T 100BASE TX T 100BASE TX connector RJ45 1 The QJ71MT91 detects whether 10BASE T or 100BASE TX is used according to the hub 3 Serial number plate Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate 1 The LED on the connector is not lit Depending on the serial number the connector orientation is left right reversal 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 1 Indications of indicator LEDs 1 QJ71MT91 RUN O L3 ERR INIT O CI COM ERR OPENI 100M SD O RD RUN Operation status m Normal completion of basic Basic parameter setting in INIT Initial processing status parameter setting progress or nonexistent TCP connection open Presence of open TCP Absence of open TCP NC connection connection SD Send status Data send in progress Data not yet sent ERR Setting error status Error Normal setting Communication error Communication error Normal communication in COM ERR status occurrence 2 progress 100M 100Mbps
144. U response monitoring timer when it receives a request message from the master 1 in the figure The CPU response monitoring timer monitors the programmable controller CPU processing until the QJ71MT91 starts sending a response message to the master 2 in the figure c When the CPU response monitoring timer reaches the preset time the QJ71MT91 performs the following processings 3 in the figure 1 Issues the error code 7380n 1 2 Issues the exception code 04n to the master side 2 1 Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error code 2 Refer to Section 11 3 2 for details of the exception code When the CPU response monitoring timer value is Oms the QJ71MT91 waits until the programmable controller CPU completes processing Limitless waiting 4 Preferred node specification a Relationship between preferred node specification and TCP connection opening and closing 1 The QJ71MT91 opens and closes TCP connections automatically 2 The QJ71MT91 can open up to 64 TCP connections simultaneously 3 Before opening a new TCP connection in addition to already open 64 TCP connections the QJ71MT91 automatically closes the TCP connection that has not communicated for the longest time among the non communicating ones At this time the TCP connections with the target devices specified as the preferred nodes are not closed 4 Ifthe number of TCP connections used by the QJ71MT91 exceeds 64 specify the preferred nodes for
145. URES AND SETTING MELSEC Q b When the basic parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters Intelligent function module switch setting Communication starting conditions lt Switch 2 gt b1 b0 starting method MODBUS device assignment parameter 0 Start with the default parameters Basic parameter starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters QJ71MT91 operation Default parameter setting MODBUS device Module READY XO Parameter setting operation Basic parameter setting request Y1 Basic parameter setting normally X1 completed Basic parameter x3 existence MODBUS device assignment parameter Y8 setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter x8 setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter XA setting existence assignment parameters Basic parameter creation Function execution Automatic communication function Master function Dedicated instruction Master function Slave function GX Developer connection Power OFF then ON Pro gram mable control ler CPU reset Started Executable Request message acceptable GX Developer connectable
146. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the QJ71MT91 s performance specifications I O signals for programmable controller CPU and buffer memory For general specifications refer to QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 1 Performance Specifications This section provides the performance specifications of the QJ71MT91 Specifications Reference Item 2 10BASE T 100BASE TX Section Data transmission rate 10Mbps 100Mbps eo specification Cable compliant with the Cable compliant with the 3 IEEE802 3 10BASE T IEEE802 3 100BASE TX Standard unshielded Standard shielded Section 2 2 twisted pair cable UTP twisted pair cable STP cable Category 3 4 5 cable Category 5 Connector applicable for external wiring RJ45 LNumberofsaves 4 64slavs aame communica 7 tion function 4k words Section 4k words 3 3 1 Number of instructions that can be executed Up to 8 instructions concurrently 5 Dedicated r 3 p MBRW instruction 9 functions instruction Function for send MBREG instruction 19 functions Chapter 4 Input area size Max 253 bytes per instruction Chapter 4 Output area size Max 253
147. V file creating 1 Production number display Since the QJ71MT91 does not support the production number display is displayed The serial number displayed on the Product Information List screen of GX Developer may differ from that on the rating plate or on the front of the module The serial number on the rating plate or on the front of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the Product Information List screen indicates the functional information of the product The functional information of the product will be updated when a function is added 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 Checking the software version of GX Configurator MB The software version of GX Configurator MB can be checked in GX Developer s Product information screen Operating procedure GX Developer gt Help gt Product information Product information Programming and Maintenance tool GX Developer Version 8 12N Sw8D5C GPP w E COPYRIGHT C 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to Name MITSUBISHI Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co ProductlD M4 List of version information on Add in software GX Configurator MB Version1 018 SW1D5C QMBU E Software version COPYRIGHTIC 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Warming This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties
148. X Configurator MB do not make MELSEC Q Parameter Basic parameter setting parameter settings by Y signals 0 730BuH starting request Y1 COM ERR A before Basic parameter setting method error Automatic communication i existence X3 turns on after parameter setting request erii automatic communication P P start request Y4 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 Monitoring Any of the monitoring timer hor tf p Review the monitoring timer 7310 timer setting setting in the basic parameter COM ERR O 11 24 error Preferred node specification setting error Subnet mask pattern setting error Default router IP address setting error Subnet address setting error Router IP address setting error Number of routers setting error KeepAlive setting error Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection setting error Local slave station port No error is incorrect The setting of the preferred node specification in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the subnet mask pattern in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the default router IP address in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the subnet address in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the router IP address in the basic parameter is incorrect The net ID of the local station differs from the net ID of the router IP address The se
149. a is less than the setting of the split reception monitoring timer value The setting of the write data storage size in the dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Correct the buffer memory setting outside the range Review the setting of the IP address Review the setting range of the MODBUS device Review the setting range of the MODBUS device Review the setting of the module ID Review the setting of the execution type Review the setting of the response monitoring timer so that it falls within the setting range Make the response monitoring timer greater than the split reception monitoring timer value Review the setting of the write data storage size MELSEC Q Continued on next page 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action 012 Error Code 11 28 Request message size setting error Automatic communication function start interruption Basic parameter not set Redundant setting error Exception message reception Byte count error Reference number error The request message size specified in the argument S2 0 of the MBREQ instruction is incorrect The start of the automatic communication function was interrupted due to the processing of the basic parameter setting The automatic communication
150. a of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory areas set for auto refresh are automatically read from written to the specified devices when the END instruction of the CPU module is executed Monitor test The buffer memory and I O signals of the QJ71MT91 are monitored or tested Various setting status module status Monitor test aot Moonie Section 8 6 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter status Automatic communication status Error log Communication status PING test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package For how to install or uninstall the utility package refer to Method of installing the MELSOFT Series included in the utility package 8 2 1 Handling precautions The following explains the precautions on using the GX Configurator MB 1 For safety Since GX Configurator MB is add in software for GX Developer read Safety Precautions and the basic operating procedures in the GX Developer Operating Manual 2 About installation 4 5 GX Configurator MB is add in software for GX Developer Version 4 or later Therefore GX Configurator MB must be installed on the personal computer that has already GX Developer Version 4 or later installed Screen error of Intelligent function module utility Insufficient system resource may cause the screen to be displayed inappropriately while using the Intelligent function module utility If
151. a storage order Response message is stored in order of low order to high order bytes starting at the lowest device number 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The programmable controller CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 The number of read bytes is 4 from 2 Read points X 2 4 1 The received response message data are stored in order of L low order to H high order bytes starting at the lowest device number of the response message storing devices D1 1 to D1 n 2 When the response message size is an odd number the last high byte of the response message storing device is overwritten by O 10 14 10 14 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function MELSEC Q To the slave specified by the Target IP address of the control data the request message can be sent using any given PDU protocol data unit format A maximum of eight MBREQ instructions can be executed simultaneously Create a sequence program so that the number of simultaneously executed The QJ71MT91 automatically opens a TCP connection with a target slave when Whether TCP connection closing processing is performed or not can be selected When communication with the same target device is made frequently using the dedicated instruction setting TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion saves the time required
152. aa tha dta pnta 9 1 9 1 2 Automatic communication parameter setting sesseeneneneeneen enne 9 4 9 1 3 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting sssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeene 9 7 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration ssssssssseeeeeeneneneen ens 9 11 9 2 1 System configuration and program conditions sse 9 11 9 2 2 Program using utility package sssseeeeeeenenennennen eene nnnm nnne nnns 9 18 9 2 3 Program without using utility package seeneenennenenenenennennnnnnes 9 22 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network een 9 29 9 3 1 System configuration and program conditions sesssseeeeenm en 9 29 9 3 2 Program using utility package sse nennen ennemis 9 35 9 3 3 Program without using utility package seeenenenennenne nennen 9 39 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices seenennenenen 10 1 10 2 Z P MBRW 3nd de etaed ie dL Ure d re d LL n Ld dre de 10 2 10 3 Z ByMBREGQG c ooa odes o a iod a e dua e deos 10 11 11 1 Troubleshooting ssssssssesseeeeeneeneennen nennen nnne nnne nnne nre erret rnit ee nnne nnne rre 11 1 11 2 Confirming QJ7 1M T91 Status needed eret ene eite Pe Dead ede dance 11 12 A 10 A 10 11 3 Enron COdes 4 niis dete
153. able for the router relay function Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address Number of routers set Router information Change the default values set to the basic parameters as necessary Refer to Section 7 2 for details of the routing information QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP Master function slave device 4 Router 2 c m 0 fo o o DD Dn Ls Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet MODBUS TCP slave device 3 MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP slave device 1 slave device 2 1 When the slave function of the QJ71MT91 is used to communicate with the master device on another Ethernet communication can be made without use of the router relay function 2 A system using a Proxy router need not use the router relay function 3 The router relay function is not the function that operates the QU71MT91 as a router FUNCTION tee MELSEC Q 5 6 GX Developer Connection Function 1 GX Developer connection function a The GX Developer connection function allows connection to GX Developer via the QJ71MT91 b The QJ71MT91 can connect a maximum of eight GX Developer c Refer to Section 7 2 3 for the GX Developer connection setting 2 Accessible range Refer to Section 2 3 for details of the accessible range 3 GX Developer connection setup Refer to Appendix 3 for the method of GX Developer connection se
154. after Basic parameter setting existence X3 has turned on Delete the automatic communication parameter setting When mounting the QJ71MT91 on the main base unit of a redundant system the master function cannot be used Refer to the exception code returned from the target slave device and resolve the problem Resolve the problem that occurred in the target slave device On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not Continued on next page 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code 11 29 Protocol ID error Module ID mismatch error Function code mismatch error Response message contents mismatch error Automatic communication function stop request error Automatic communication parameter setting request error Response monitoring timer time out error In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the protocol ID of the received response message is other than 0 MODBUS protocol In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the module ID in the MBAP header of the received response message does not match the request message In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the function code of the received response message does not match the request message In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the contents of the recei
155. allow the cause to be identified in more detail the error code is stored into the QJ71MT91 buffer memory The exception code and error code can be confirmed in the error log area address CFEH to DFF n of the buffer memory 1 Refer to Section 11 3 for the confirmation method and details of the exception code and error code 2 Refer to Section 4 2 for details of the PDU protocol data unit 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 1 Read coils FC 01 Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more coils Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 2000 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head coil number Read points 014 00001 to FFFF 00014 to 07D0 L 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data Po Device data 014 read bytes 1 n n Number of read bytes n gt E Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Device data 1 Bit device storage order Device data n The read coil statuses are stored in order from low order to high order bits When the number of read points is not a multiple of 8 the excess bits turn to 0 When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 81H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Sectio
156. ameter This section setting is completed 3 6 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action 3 Section 3 Slave function of Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on This section QJ71MT91 does 1 4 not return Check if the MODBUS device Refer to MODBUS device assignment response assignment parameter setting existence parameter setting existence XA does message to XA is on not turn on This section 2 11 request message Check whether the basic parameters Restart the automatic communication were re set during reception of a request function after basic parameter re setting message is completed Section 7 2 The slave function stops when the basic parameters are re set Check whether the QJ71MT91 has Confirm the exception code and take soon s ection 11 3 returned an exception code or not corrective action Refer to the error log area OCFEu to Take the corresponding corrective Section 11 3 ODFFu and confirm the error code action Is the request message sent to the Correct the request message issued by QJ71MT91 correct the master Check the following for the message length The application data unit length in Ethernet frame is 6 or more From Chapter 4 Transaction ID to Message length in MBAP header The MBAP header length 6 equals the application data unit length in Ethernet frame Refer to Communication with tar
157. ameter setting request ON Being requested OFF Not requested Section 9 1 1 Section 9 1 1 Y2 Use prohibited Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 ON Parameter setting being requested start being requested A OFF No parameter setting requested no peu start requested Section 5 2 1 9 1 2 9 1 2 Y5 Use prohibited Automatic communication stop request ON Being requested OFF Not requested Use prohibited MODBUS device assignment parameter Y8 setting request ON Being requested OFF Not requested f Use prohibited Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 9 1 3 Section 9 1 3 1 Turns ON when the QJ71MT91 is ready after the programmable controller is turned ON from OFF or after the programmable controller CPU is reset Continued on next page 3 3 3 SPECIFICATIONS Signal Direction QJ71MT91 Programmable controller CPU Device Signal name MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set X UJ X iw x a X10 x11 X12 Use prohibited X13 x14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X1A COM ERR LED status X1B ON Lit OFF Not lit PING test completed X1C ON PING test completed OFF X1D Use prohibited X1E Watch dog timer error X1F ON Module error occurred OFF Module operating normally Important Reference section Section 9 1 3 MELSEC Q
158. atic communication function satisfy all of the following conditions Condition 1 Module READY XO is on Condition 2 Basic parameter setting existence X3 is on Condition 3 Automatic communication operation status X6 is on 3 Amn error will occur if Automatic communication stop request Y6 is executed when the automatic communication function has stopped Automatic communication operation status X6 is off 5 4 5 FUNCTIONS 4 5 MELSEC Q Even if no response is sent from the communication target slave the automatic communication function does not stop until Automatic communication stop request Y6 turns on When the automatic communication function stops the TCP connections used by the automatic communication function are all disconnected When the automatic communication parameters are set on GX Configurator MB When the automatic communication parameters are set on GX Configurator MB the automatic communication function will be automatically started at the timing shown in 2 a of this section When the automatic communication function is active and when the target slave device is not in normal condition disconnected down not ready for communication etc perform either of the following After the target slave device is recovered set automatic communication parameters on the sequence program and start the automatic communication function Ignore the error Exception message reception err
159. ation start request Au parameter setting completed Au parameter setting completed Automa operation status Automa parame storage Au parame storage area area omatic communication omatic communica omatic communica ic communica ic communica er error code omatic communication er setting result a When setting is completed normally i parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication start Automatic communication parameter creation xo OFF x3 OFF nication OFF Y4 nication normally x4 nication error X5 nication X6 7 nication 0C111 7 Error code and setting result clear nication resu 0C12u ages gt Executed by QJ71MT91 gt Executed by sequence program b When setting is completed with an error i Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed Automatic communication start pobesscscsseveasesecococs 1 1 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Automatic communication parameter creation error Automatic communication parameter correction x0 OFF x3 OFF OFF Y4 ion normally OFF x4 ion error OFF X5 ion X6 ion 0C11H Error code and setting result storage Error code and setting result clear 0C12u gt Execut
160. c parameter setting a When setting is completed normally Basic parameter setting normally completed Basic parameter Parameter creation creation Module READY x0 Basic parameter setting request Y1 O Basic parameter setting normally X1 completed Basic parameter setting error X2 completed Basic parameter setting existence X3 Basic parameter error code storage area Error code 0C10H clear arand gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program b When setting is completed with an error Basic parameter setting normally completed P i Basic parameter Basic parameter creation error correction Parameter creation ON Module READY xo QEF Basic parameter OFF setting request Y1 Basic parameter OFF setting normally X1 completed Basic parameter OFF setting error x2 completed Basic parameter OFF setting existence x3 Error code clear Error code Basic parameter storage error code storage area 0C10x Sai Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for basic parameter setting a When setting the basic parameters with a sequence program set the basic parameter starting method b0 of the intelligent function module switch 2 refer to Section 6 6 to ON Start with the user set parameters b Turn ON Basic parameter setting r
161. cation parameter error code 0C11H storage area 3089 Basic parameter Basic parameter error code storage area Automatic communication Parameter parameter error information Automatic communication parameter setting result 0C12H storage area 3090 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code 0C13H storage area 3091 0C14H 3092 Error assigned 0C15xH group No 3093 MODBUS device assignment MODBUS device assignment Error device type parameter parameter setting result storage area Automatic communication operation status storage 0C20 to 0C23H area parameter 1 to 64 3104 to 3107 Automatic ee Automatic communication error code storage area 0C28u to OC67H communication Master parameter 1 to 64 3112 to 3175 j function function OCFEdu to ODFFH Error log area 3326 to 3583 ERI OCFEn to ODFFu 3326 to 3583 Slave function Error log area 3326 to 3583 GX Developer connection Error log area 3326 to 3583 Communication status of each protocol DEAE ESF 3600 to 3727 1 Basic parameter error code storage area a When an error occurs with the basic parameter setting request Y1 ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area b The error code is stored when the basic parameter setting error completed X2 turns ON c The error code is cleared when the basic parameter setting normally completed X1 turns ON 11 15 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 4 11 16 MELSEC Q
162. code list When an error occurs in any processing of the QJ71MT91 the error code is stored into its buffer memory This section explains the error details and corrective actions to be taken at error occurrence The Occurrence field of the following error code table indicates that each of the errors may occur when 1 The programmable controller is powered ON or the basic parameters are set 2 Master function is on 3 Slave function is on 4 GX Developer connection function is on or 5 During PING test or unit test Error Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Occurrence ipti i iv i Code p ala SEB Error code issued by programmable controller Role foe USES to y prog Manual Hardware Design 4FFFH GF Maintenance and Inspection U The setting of the intelligent function module switch 1 73011 Switch 1 error a operation mode setting is incorrect The setting of the intelligent 73024 Switch 2error Teton module switch 2 communication condition setting is incorrect 3 The setting of the intelligent lam function module switch 3 4 IP error RUE de address setting is incorrect Review the setting of the intelligent function module switch 1 Review the setting of the intelligent function module switch 2 Review the setting of the intelligent function module switch 3 4 Review the setting of the The setting of the intelligent intelligent fungti n module function module switch 5 redundant
163. ction describes checking methods for the function version of the QJ71MT91 and the software version of GX Configurator MB 1 Checking the function version of the QJ71MT91 The serial number and function version of the QJ71MT91 can be checked on the rating plate front of the module or system monitor window in GX Developer a Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of the QJ71MT91 MITSUBISHI MODEL MAC ADD Serial number first 5 digits Function version Relevant regulation standards wa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN b Checking on the front of the module The serial number and function version on the rating plate is printed on the front at the bottom of the module QJ71MT91 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M SD RD 10BASE T 100BASE TX E QUMI e LZ JL T I 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q c Checking on the System Monitor screen Product Information List To display the system monitor select Diagnostics System monitor gt Product Inf List button of GX Developer Function version Serial No Production number Product Information List slot Type series Model name I Points I 0 No master PLC Serial No Ver Product No QO6UDHCPU E E E 0 0 Intelli Q QJ71MT91 32pt 0000 090720000000000 B 0 1 None 0 2 None 0 3 in None 0 None CS
164. d the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions Installation Precautions NCAUTION e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module e Use the programmable controller in the operating environment that meets the general specifications described in the user s manual of the CPU Module to use Using the programmable controller in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the module e While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of the module insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit to mount the module Incorrect module mounting may cause a malfunction failure or drop of the module In an environment of frequent vibrations secure the module with the screw e Be sure to tighten the screws using the specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e Do not directly touch any conductive part or electronic component of the module Doing so may cause a malfunction or failure of th
165. device assignment function Using MODBUS device assignment parameters the MODBUS devices are correlated with the programmable controller CPU device memory This enables direct access from the master to the programmable controller CPU device memory Supporting the MODBUS devices of large capacity the QJ71MT91 allows all device memories of the programmable controller CPU to be assigned P bl ET QJ71MT91 Slave function MODBUS TCP master device MODBUS device assignment parameters D300 qu 400500 Request message holding register 400500 read request THE Response message holding register 400500 1234u Ethernet 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 Concurrent operation of master and slave functions The master and slave functions can be operated concurrently This enables flexible construction of a MODBUS TCP communication based system a Example of communication between QJ71MT91 and third party devices Third party programmable controller QJ71MT91 Third party remote I O Master Master slave function Slave Request Request TF message message NS 0n Response Response E gy Oy j message message X Ethernet Master 4 1 Slave er 4 2 gt Slave 1 In response to a request message from the master the QJ71MT91 operates as
166. disconnected Target device The port number setting of the port No error target device is erroneous Target device IP address 74011 error 74021 Open failure 11 35 The IP address setting of the target device is erroneous A TCP connection was not established in the open processing A send error occurred COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Retry after a little while If this error occurs at execution of the dedicated instruction set TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion in the close option of the control data Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the open status of the target device Review the IP address port No setting and other parameters of the target device Check the line status for an error Retry after a little while Decrease the number of TCP connections used simultaneously Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Review the port number setting of the target device at the time of transmission Review the IP address setting of the target device at the time of transmission Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the open status of the target device Review the IP address port No setting and other parameters of the target
167. dress of the target device at the time of transmission Check whether the target device with the specified IP address exists on the line or not As the line may be busy retry after a little while Review the IP reassembly timer value of the target device COM ERR O OjJ O O Review the IP address of the target device at the time of transmission Review the setting of the routing information Review the setting of the subnet mask pattern COM ERR COM ERR Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Review the TCP ULP timer value of the basic parameter Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error COM ERR COM ERR Continued on next page 11 37 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error ave Code Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Connection not open 7453H Transmission was attempted using the connection not open The connection used to send data was already closed The connection being closed was used to send data COM ERR Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error
168. e X3 X Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed x5 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed QJ71MT91 FEED i xe Automatic communication operation status input output r MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed Y1 Basic parameter setting request Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic Output Y4 NS communication start request Y8 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request External input command Parameter setting command yso Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error External output A m LEES Ya1 Automatic communication parameter 2 communication error D4000 to D4003 Automatic communication operation status storage area parameter 1 to 64 D4008 to D4071 Automatic communication error code storage area parameter 1 to 64 Automatic communication operation status storage D4092 to D4095 area parameter 1 to 64 For auto refresh NECS i D4096 to D4159 Automatic communication function buffer input area D5000 to D5099 Automatic communication function buffer output area D9001 Basic parameter error code acquisition D9002 Automatic communication parameter error code acquisition Data register D9003 Automatic communication parameter setting result acquisition D9004 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code acquisition MODBUS devi D9005 VUE
169. e Is the QJ71MT91 mounted the Replace the QJ71MT91 with the not switched function version D one having the function version D when or later communication Has the QJ71MT91 issued a system Use SD1590 of the control system error occurs Switching request to the control CPU module to check if the system CPU module QJ71MT91 has issued a system switching request Is the system switching setting Check if the system switching enabled cause settings b1 to b3 in the intelligent function module switch Section 6 6 5 redundant settings are enabled Is any Ethernet cable disconnected Check the wiring status of the when linkup has not yet been Ethernet cable performed after system startup The system switching due to the disconnection detection can be detected after linkup was performed normally Is the setting value of the Review the setting value of the disconnection detection time correct disconnection detection time b8 to b15 in the intelligent function Section 6 6 module switch 5 redundant settings Is the setting value in TCP ULP timer Review the TCP ULP timer value Section 7 2 correct of the basic parameter Is the KeepAlive enabled Set the KeepAlive of the basic parameter to Used to switch the Section 5 4 systems by timeout detection of Section 7 2 KeepAlive start timer correct value of the basic parameter Section 7 2 interval timer correct timer value of the basic parameter Section 7 2 Is the TCP connection op
170. e set value X 500ms 0007 KeepAlive start timer value 4B0 RIW et time set value X ms KeepAlive Sett t val 500 1200 0008 P KeepAlive interval timer value 14 20 H TCP UDP Set time set value X 500ms Section 7 2 i wo N OW Ol A N o lt OLE oo tis IP setting KeepAlive resend count 3a Rw dos Router relay function 000B to Basic 000C parameter Subnet mask pattern FFFFFFOO 11 to 12 000D to 000E Default router IP address 13 to 14 ae Routing Number of routers set ic OR information BUE o Subnet Heit Bouter address 0012 to information 1 Router IP 3 iSi address 0014 to 002F 20 to 47 o o Router information 2 to 8 Samas rouer mtomaton 1 as router Gees 1 GX 0030 Bibi Number of TCP connections for GX 1 RW Section 48 Developer connection i 7 2 information setting 0031 to 010F System area use prohibited 49 to 271 Continued on next page amp 1 Indicates whether the address is readable and or writable from to a sequence program R Readable W Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled O Setting enabled X Setting disabled 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial Reference Address Application Name Initial Value Write Setting Section 1 2 0110 272 Local slave station port No Section Target slave port No for automatic commun
171. e Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 Program example a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlocks depending on the link status of the remote master station local station and remote I O station other station The following example shows communication program interlocks using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station station No 1 SB47 H KO Co gt SB47 Baton pass status host SB49 H KO p m J SB49 Host data link status SW70 0 H Kr 1 2 2 SW70 Baton pass status of each S740 H KH station 9 40 SW74 Cyclic transmission status 98 0 H ko of each station a 14 J SW78 Parameter communication SB20 TO n 7 13 nu status of each station MG No m SB20 Module status No NT DS E ME EE m l Program for automatic communication function Refer to b in this section l L JTS l MCR NO Set the following value in the timer constant K Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Sequence scan time X 4 or more Parameter communication status Sequence scan time X 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Reason To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise or other condition Note that
172. e MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 Operation mode setting status Switch 2 Communication condition setting status Default parameter Basic parameter starting method MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting Default parameter method Online change enable disable Disable Send frame specification Ethernet v2 0 Switch 3 4 Local station IP address setting status Module READY Accessible Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Test Items Monitor Test Items Buiter memory Reon address section Switch 1 Operation mode setting status iade ei P i 3072 Intelligent Basic Basic parameter starting method starting method function Communication MODBUS device assignment 0CO1 module switch Switch 2 condition setting REG ee starting method Gordy Section 6 6 status Online Eccl enable disable setting status 3 Send frame Send frame specification ication Switch 0CO02u to OCO3H Local station IP ad tting stat ocal station IP address setting status 3074 to 3075 Module READY Section 11 1 Watch dog timer error SJ section 1 4 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q Buffer memory Reference Monitor Test Items address section lt
173. e master The programmable controller CPU device memory value can be stored in the QJ71MT91 buffer memory and the QJ71MT91 buffer memory value can be stored in the programmable controller CPU device memory Data can be stored by either of the following Automatic refresh setting on GX Configurator MB Refer to Section 8 5 Transfer using intelligent function module devices Un GO Refer to QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB GX Configurator MB is a tool designed to support sequence program creation necessary for the parameter setting auto refresh and monitor test of the QJ71MT91 8 1 Functions of the Utility Package The following table lists the GX Configurator MB functions Item Description 1 The following items that require initial setting Basic parameters Automatic communication parameters Initial setting MODBUS device assignment parameters Section 8 4 The initially set data are registered to the CPU module parameters and automatically written to the QJ71MT91 when the CPU module enters the RUN status The QJ71MT91 s buffer memory is configured for automatic refresh Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area i Automatic communication operation status storage area Auto refresh setting Section 8 5 User free area The dat
174. e QJ71MT91 The following I O signal assignment is based on the case where the start I O No of the QJ71MT91 is 0000 installed to slot 0 of the main base unit Device X represents an input signal from the QJ71MT91 to the programmable controller CPU Device Y shows an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the QJ71MT91 Refer to the corresponding reference sections for details Signal Direction QJ71MT91 Programmable controller CPU Device No Signal name Module READY 1 ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting normally completed ON Normally completed OFF Basic parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Basic parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed ON Normally completed OFF Automatic communication parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Automatic communication error status ON Error occurred OFF No error MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed ON Normally completed OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Automatic communication operation status X6 ON Operating OFF Stopped Signal Direction Programmable controller CPU QJ71MT91 Reference Device Reference Signal name section No section Basic par
175. e appears 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 5 2 Program example for use of sequence program This section explains how to perform a PING test from a sequence program 1 Relationship between PING test and I O signals a Turn ON the PING test execution request Y 1C to execute the PING test 1 in the figure Data set for PING test Communication time check 1s PING test data creation Transmission count 4 times IP address 192 1 0 1 PING test execution request mae 3 PING test X1C completed PING test in execution Communication time check period 1s e Normal Normal Exception Normal QJ71MT91 response response response response PING test results Execution result 0000u Total packet transmission count 4 times Success count 3 times Failure count 1 time Ethernet line Target device Normal response is identified when the response of the PING test is received within the communication time check period b On completion of the PING test the PING test completion X1C turns ON 2 in the figure c Turn OFF the PING test execution request Y1C to turn OFF the PING test completion X1C 3 in the figure 2 Error completion of PING test a The execution result of the PING test is stored into the execution result area OFE5 When error completion arises the error code is stored For the corrective actions to be taken at error completion
176. e at the time of transmission Check whether the target device with the specified IP address exists on the line or not Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Replace the target device with the one having the ARP function Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Continued on next page 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q ipti i iv i Code 742CH 11 37 ICMP error packet reception Router relay function error UDP check sum error TCP ULP time out error TCP check sum error The error packet of ICMP was received Without the routing information setting of the basic parameter data were attempted to be sent to the target device that has a different IP address class or net ID The routing information setting of the basic parameter is erroneous A check sum error was detected in the UDP protocol The TCP ULP timer timed out ACK is not returned from the target device A check sum error was detected in the TCP protocol Review the setting of the router information Check whether the router operates normally Check the router communication path for any error Check the communication path ahead of the router for any error Review the IP ad
177. e error code storage location and details d Section 11 4 describes how to turn OFF the COM ERR LED e Section 11 5 describes the PING test About the notation of the numerical values used in this manual Among the numerical values used in this manual H is placed to the right of the units place for hexadecimal notation Example 10 Decimal 10H Hexadecimal ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module QJ71MT91 The abbreviation for the QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module A generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network A generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial interface The abbreviation for the function code The abbreviation for the sub code A generic term for the Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Universal model QCPU Basic model QCPU A generic term for the Q00JCPU Q00CPU and Q01CPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU A generic term for the QO2PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU A generic term for the QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO3UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDVCPU QO04UDEHCPU Universal model CPU QOGUDHCPU QO6UDVCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDE
178. e following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 11 44 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 1 From GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q This section explains how to conduct a PING test from GX Configurator MB 1 Display the PING test screen Refer to Section 8 6 PING test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name QJZ1MTSI Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Communication time check Transmission count IP address Current value Setting value 0 0 0 0 PING test execution request Not requested Being requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count OFF Failure count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Decimal input Monitoring Setting range Execute test 2 Set the PING test conditions Set the Communication time check Transmission count and IP address in the Setting value field and click the Execute test button with the values selected PING test Module information Module type X MODBUS R Module Module model name QJZ1MT81 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Communication time check Transmission count Current value IP address PING test execution request PING test c
179. e interval timer expires The QJ71MT91 sends the KeepAlive message for alive check by the number of times set as the KeepAlive resend count until it receives ACK from the target device d An alive check error occurs if the QJ71MT91 cannot receive ACK from the target device after it has sent the KeepAlive message for alive check by the number of times set as the KeepAlive resend count At that time the QJ71MT91 forcibly closes the TCP connection and issues an error code 5 FUNCTIONS lt Operation of KeepAlive function gt QJ71MT91 KeepAlive resend count 3 times Timeout Timeout Timeout Alive check error pore d Start Stop Start start g Start h I i timer A A 4 KeepAlive Start Timeout Start Timeout i start 1 1 1 1 timer ps j Y Message Message Message Message Message Message A A e KeepAive messas A K QOr i e e e KeepAlve res a oniwe re Ae messes v 4 Message Message Message Error Meg age MegSage MesSage P e P lt 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 5 Router Relay Function 1 Router relay function The router relay function enables data communications with slave devices connected to other Ethernets via routers and gateways 2 To use router relay function To use the router relay function set the router relay function of the basic parameter to Used Default Not used The following basic parameters are avail
180. e interval timer value instruction requires Check if the number of TCP connections Retry as TCP connections may fail a long time to be connected simultaneously is within 64 temporarily completed TCP connections with the nodes not specified as preferred ones may be closed automatically when the Section 3 1 connection resources become Section 7 2 insufficient Specify the nodes as preferred ones when necessary Reduce the number of simultaneously connected connections Check whether the QJ71MT91 has If two or more send requests are issued issued two or more send requests long time is required as they are concurrently processed in due order Reduce the QJ71MT91 loads Check whether the target device Confirm the processing performance requires a long time to respond of the target device If the target device has any problem check and take corrective action of the QJ71MT91 slave function Check whether the QJ71MT91 has If two or more send requests are issued issued two or more send requests long time is required as they are concurrently processed in due order Reduce the QJ71MT91 loads uer Neu problem in traffic QJ71MT91 Check the specifications using the Reduce the processing time to within the responds slowly processing time performance expression range of the performance expression Appendix 2 11 10 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section
181. e module Wiring Precautions NWARNING e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply before installation or wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage to the product e Use crimp contact pressure displacement or soldering to wire the connectors for external connections properly using the manufacturer specified tools If the connection is incomplete it may cause the module to short circuit catch fire or malfunction CAUTION e Securely connect the connector to the module e Make sure to place the communication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or fastened with a clamp their positions may be unstable or moved and they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction because of faulty cable connections e Wire the module correctly after confirming the type of the connected interface If the cable is connected to a different interface or wired incorrectly it may cause a fire or breakdown e When disconnecting the communication and power cables from the module do not pull the cables by hand When disconnecting a cable with a connector hold the connector to the module by hand and pull it out to remove the cable If the cable is pulled while being connected to the module it may damage the module and or cable or make cable contact improper
182. e ong en E XCODU ionresponse 777777777 2 Slave function Request message not acceptable Reha REPE parameters Request message acceptable Bice ee NI quee oe ee ose c UMHOUassIgnmensparamerers o 2 1 S 2 D J iouee9 9 2 v GX Developer connection GX Developer not connectable GX Developer connectable 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q d When the basic parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters Intelligent function module switch setting lt Switch 2 gt b1 bO Basic parameter starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters Communication starting conditions Default parameter QJ71MT91 operation setting not made m Module READY X0 Basic parameter Y1 Basic parameter setting request creation Basic parameter setting normally X1 completed Basic parameter X3 jPower existence OFF then MODBUS device ON assignment parameter yg Pro setting request gram MODBUS device mable assignment parameter yg control setting normally ler completed CPU MODBUS evice reset assignment parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignmen
183. e used to make communication from a sequence program at any timing The QJ71MT91 supports the following two dedicated instructions 1 MBRW instruction Reads writes MODBUS device data from to a slave This enables slave data to be read out to the programmable controller CPU device memory or programmable controller CPU data to be written to the slave 2 MBREQ instruction Can issue user desired request message format function code 1 data unit to a slave 1 Refer to Chapter 4 for the function code MODBUS TCP slave device Holding register Programmable controller CPU Command L 4 venw E Device memory 1234u QJ71MT91 Master function Request message holding register 400500 read request Response message holding register 400500 1234H Ethernet eue 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 2 Supporting slave function of MODBUS TCP communication The QJ71MT91 supports the slave function of MODBUS TCP communication which is an open network system for factory automation and it is compatible with various MODBUS TCP master devices hereafter abbreviated to the masters of other manufacturers The slave function supports the following two functions a Automatic response function The QJ71MT91 can automatically respond to a request message received from the master A sequence program for the slave function is not needed b MODBUS
184. ecifications of the QJ71MT91 b Section 3 2 and 3 3 give the I O signal and buffer memory lists of the QJ71MT91 4 MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 Chapter 4 a Section 4 1 gives a list of MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 b Section 4 2 and 4 3 provide the frame specifications of the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 5 Usable functions Chapter 5 Chapter 5 describes the functions of the QJ71MT91 6 Settings and procedures necessary to operate the system Chapter 6 Chapter 6 describes the pre operation settings and procedures 7 Parameter setting of the QJ71MT91 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 describes the parameter setting procedures and parameter details 8 Parameter setting from the utility package Chapter 8 Chapter 8 describes the utility package operation method 9 Parameter setting from sequence programs Chapter 9 Chapter 9 describes the I O signals used for parameter setting the I O signal timing charts and program examples 10 Reading Writing etc of MODBUS device data with sequence programs Chapter 10 Chapter 10 describes the dedicated instructions designed to perform read write etc of MODBUS device data with sequence programs 11 Error codes and corresponding corrective actions Chapter 11 a Section 11 1 describes the troubleshooting b Section 11 2 describes how to check the module condition c Section 11 3 describes th
185. ed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 5 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for automatic communication parameter setting a b Turn ON Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 after Module READY X0 and Basic parameter setting existence X3 have turned ON When the automatic communication parameter setting is completed with an error the erroneous parameter is stored into the automatic communication parameter setting result storage area address 0C12H 3090 of the buffer memory and an error code is stored into the automatic communication parameter error code storage area address 0C11H 3089 Identify the stored parameter check its error code take corrective action and make a parameter setting request again Refer to Section 11 3 for details of the error code The QJ71MT91 does not clear the automatic communication function buffer input area address 1000H to 1FFFH 4096 to 8191 and automatic communication function buffer output area address 3000H to 3FFFH 12288 to 16383 which are used for write read setting of the buffer memory when the automatic communication function is started in the status of Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X4 Clear them as necessary using a sequence program The automatic communication parameter setting is not allowed in the offline mode intelligent function module switch 1 00
186. ee 4 3 Application data esssssssss 4 3 Ethernet header sss 4 3 ECS erana mn aaa aa 4 3 IP Tieader z Rep 4 3 MBAP header 2 c cccceeceeeeteeeeteeeeneeees 4 3 Message length sssssssss 4 3 MODBUS TCP application data unit 4 3 MODBUS application header 4 3 MODBUS TCP ADU ssssss 4 3 Module ID ssssseseee 4 3 PDU zs amets 4 3 Protocol data unit 4 3 Protocol ID nt 4 3 TCP header ccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeees 4 3 Transaction ID iisi ia 4 3 FUNCHON IIS om edat hie teh 5 1 Function version sess 2 7 GX Configurator MB sesesss 8 1 GX Developer Accessible range s es 5 15 GX Developer connection function 5 15 GX Developer connection information Settilig iced He rrr ae 7 16 GX Developer connection setup 5 15 GX Developer connection setup example Asami telat dete IRE App 6 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection 7 16 System monitor of GX Developer 11 12 Index 2 H Handling precautions sss 6 1 Hardware test esses 6 8 Head buffer memory address 7 21 Head coil number sssesesss 7 28 Head device number
187. ee nares 7 22 Applicable system ssssssssss 2 1 Assignment points seseesssss 7 28 Auto refresh setting sssss 8 15 Automatic communication status 8 24 Automatic communication function 5 3 Automatic communication function buffer Lc n E 5 7 Automatic communication function communication time App 2 Automatic communication function error code storage area 11 18 Automatic communication function performance sssssssseseeeese App 2 Automatic communication operation MOWGCH AN eco itte ertet set testes 5 6 Automatic communication operation status 5 5 Automatic communication operation status Storage area nnda ees 11 17 Automatic communication start stop timing rp pet DEP 5 4 Precautions for starting stopping the automatic communication function 5 4 Start and stop of automatic communication TUn llo eod eite tice ee 5 3 Target slave port No for automatic communication function 7 17 Automatic communication parameter error code storage area sss 11 16 Automatic communication parameter screen 8 33 Automatic communication parameter setting 9 4 I O signals for setting 9 4 Setting method
188. en Review the wiring and communication setting and open the TCP connection The system switching due to the communication error can be detected after the TCP connection was opened normally 11 5 11 5 The systems are not switched when communication error occurs The systems are consecutively switched When using the redundant IP mode the MODBUS TCP master cannot communicate with the QJ71MT91 of the new control system after a system switching 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING operating normally MELSEC Q Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Is the standby system CPU module Check if the power supply module of the standby system is powered on Check if the RESET L CLR switch of the standby system CPU module is set to the central position reset clear Check if no error is occurring in the standby system CPU module Is the tracking cable connected Connect the tracking cable properly properly Has the QJ71MT91 issued a system switching request to the standby system CPU module Issue a system switching request to the control system CPU module Is there any cause such as a standby system CPU module stop error which disables system switching even when the QJ71MT91 issues a system switching request Are the parameter and program written in the Redundant CPU in the backup mode Is the value of the timeout occurrence time too small Is the QJ71M
189. en correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi product
190. en set with this setting ON the slave function does not operate Refer to Section 6 6 1 for details of the communication starting conditions of this switch setting and each function c Online change enable disable setting Bit 2 Set whether to enable or disable the slave QJ71MT91 to write data to the programmable controller CPU while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status When corresponding bit is OFF Data write is disabled while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status When the slave QJ71MT91 receives a write request message from the master in this setting the slave QJ71MT91 issues the exception code 044 When corresponding bit is ON Data write is enabled while the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q d Send frame specification Bit 3 Specify the frame format in which the QJ71MT91 will send data to the target device When corresponding bit is OFF Data are sent in the Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame When corresponding bit is ON Data are sent in the IEEE802 3 compliant frame 3 IP address setting Switch 3 Switch 4 Set the IP address of the QJ71MT91 on the local station IP address 192 1 0 254 SM ELS Murau Switch 3 gt Switch 4 gt b8 b7 bO Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition
191. en the PING test is completed PING test execution request current value Being requested PING test completed current value PING test completed Result current value Result is displayed for each PING test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Communication time check Transmission count IP address Current value Setting value 92 1 0 2 PING test execution request Being requested eing requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count PING test completed Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Select input Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 48 PING test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Communication time check Transmission count IP address Current value Setting value PING test execution request Being requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count PING test completed Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file
192. equest Y1 after Module READY X0 has turned ON c After Basic parameter setting request Y1 is turned ON to start the parameter setting processing do not turn ON OFF any other output signal Y signal until Basic parameter setting normally completed X1 or Basic parameter setting error completed X2 turns ON d When the basic parameter setting is completed with an error an error code is stored into the basic parameter error code storage area address C10H 3088 of the buffer memory Check the stored error code take corrective action and make a parameter setting request again Refer to Section 11 3 for details of the error code e Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns ON when the default parameters exist f The basic parameter setting is not allowed in the offline mode intelligent function module switch 1 0001h Set the basic parameters in the online mode intelligent function module switch 1 0000n Refer to Section 6 6 1 for details of whether each function can be executed or not depending on the basic parameter setting existence 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Automatic communication parameter setting 1 Automatic communication parameter setting method Make automatic communication parameter setting in the following procedure 1 Store the parameters into the automatic communication parameter area address 0200H to 04FFH of the buffer memory 2 Turn ON Automatic communication parameter setting r
193. equest automatic communication start request Y4 2 I O signals for automatic communication parameter setting Use the following I O signals for automatic communication parameter setting Signal Name Module READY XO ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting existence X3 ON Parameter set OFF No parameters set Automatic communication parameter setting normally completed X4 ON Normally completed OFF Automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 ON Error completed OFF Automatic communication operation status X6 ON Operating OFF Stopped Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 ON Parameter setting being requested start being requested OFF No parameter setting requested no start requested 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Timing charts for automatic communication parameter setting Parameter creation Module READY Basic parameter setting existence Automatic commu parameter setting request automatic communication start request Automatic commu parameter setting completed Automatic commu parameter setting completed Automatic commu operation status Automatic commu parameter error code storage area Automatic commu parameter setting storage area Parameter creation Module READY Basic parameter setting existence Au parameter setting request automatic communic
194. er of TCP connections for GX Developer connection or the total number of TCP connections set in the preferred node specification in the basic parameter is greater than 64 The magnitude relationships between various monitoring timer values and CPU response monitoring timer value set in the basic parameters Refer to Section 7 2 2 1 are incorrect The setting of the port No for automatic communication function in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the target slave port No for automatic communication function in the basic parameter is incorrect Erroneous data have been written to the system area 00314 to OOF 1H of the buffer memory The setting of the CPU response monitoring timer in the basic parameter is incorrect Failed in basic parameter setting because the GX Configurator MB parameters were being set at power on The setting of the port No for dedicated instruction in the basic parameter is incorrect The dedicated instruction being executed was interrupted by the basic parameter setting The device code value specified in MODBUS device assignment parameter is incorrect COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Corrective Action Review the setting of the number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection and preferred node specification Review the settings of various monitoring timer values and CPU response monitoring timer value Review the s
195. erringtoQ 1 1 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference H REMTO REMTO l Manual Remote I O Network l instruction instruction ees c E ee 4 completion result MELSEC Q Turns ON External output Y40 when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Turns ON External output Y41 when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Turns OFF External output Y40 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 Turns OFF External output Y41 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 Acquires automatic communication operation status and automatic communication error code at automatic communication error Handling of ZP REMFR instruction error Refreshes automatic communication function buffer output area Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS The dedicated instructions make programming easy for use of the intelligent function module functions 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 Dedicated instruction list The following table indicates a list of ded
196. es 0 for an error occurred below the TCP UDP level at power on or in parameter setting 11 19 11 19 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 Communication status of each protocol a The numbers of corresponding events of each protocol are stored Error Name of Each Protocol Address IP packet reception count SEED P P 3600 to 3601 OE12u to OE13 Count of IP packet reception discarded due to sum check error n i d Total number of sent IP packets ps x A Simultaneous transmission error detection count ME ees 3626 to 3627 OE30nu to 0E31 ICMP packet reception count O55 ni ee ICMP 3716 to 3717 error 3718 to 3719 ts b When 2 words are exceeded a count stops at FFFFFFFFH 4294967295 11 20 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 3 2 Exception code list MELSEC Q An exception code is an error code commonly used for the MODBUS protocols which is embedded into a response message when the slave returns an exception response in reply to a request message from the master 1 When the QJ71MT91 is a master When the QJ71MT91 master has received an exception code from the target device slave take corrective actions referring to the manual for the target device slave 2 When the QJ71MT91 is a slave When the target device master has received an exception code from the QJ71MT91 slave take corrective actions referring to the following Exception li Error Name Description Illegal function Illegal da
197. es by clicking Switch setting on lt lt I O assignment of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 1 for the intelligent function module switches 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters from the Initial setting screen of GX Configurator MB a Basic parameters Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 a for the basic parameter setting b Automatic communication parameters Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 b for the automatic communication parameter setting c MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 c for the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 3 Auto refresh setting Make auto refresh setting from the Auto refresh setting screen of GX Configurator MB Set the following items for the program example Module side Module side PLC side Setting Item Transfer word count Buffer offset Device Automatic communication function buffer input area 256 100n W1000 Automatic communication function buffer output area 2560 A00n W 1388 Automatic communication operation status cM EC WOFFC Auto refresh setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 PLC side Device Module side Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count Transfer direction MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area
198. ess 4096 to 8191 Automatic communication function buffer input area 1000u to 1FFFH Section 5 2 1 Eb to 16383 ES to 3FFFH 3104 to 3107 Automatic communication operation status 1 to 64 0C20u to 0C23u 20480 to 24575 User free area input output Section 7 4 5 5000H to SFFFH Automatic communication function buffer output area 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q b Display items 1 Module side Buffer size Displays the buffer memory size of the setting item 2 Module side Transfer word count Displays the number of words to be transferred 3 Module side buffer offset Displays the offset value of the buffer memory data to be transferred 4 Transfer direction indicates that data are written from the device to the buffer memory gt indicates that data are load from the buffer memory to the device 5 PLC side Device Enter a CPU module side device that is to be automatically refreshed Applicable devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W Rand ZR When using bit devices X Y M L or B set a number that can be divided by 16 points examples X10 Y120 M16 etc Also buffer memory data are stored in a 16 point area starting from the specified device number For example if X10 is entered data are stored in X10 to X1F The devices available for MELSECNET H remote I O modules are X Y M B D and W 2 Command buttons Make text file Creates a file containing the scree
199. etails Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Communication status Module information Module type MODBUSIR Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Curent value Setting value IP IP packet reception count Count of IP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent IP packets Simultaneous transmission error detection count ICMP ICMP packet reception count Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent ICMP packets Total number of ICMP echo request received Total number of ICMP echo reply sent Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Refer to Section 8 6 5 PING test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Module model name QU71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 MELSEC Q Setting item Current value Communication time check Setting value Transmission count IP address 0 0 0 0 PING test execution request Being requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file
200. etting refer to Section 8 7 2 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting refer to Section 8 7 3 2 Command buttons Make text file Creates a file containing the screen data in text file format End setup Saves the set data and ends the operation Cancel Cancels the setting and ends the operation 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 1 2 MELSEC Q When parameters are set on the initial setting screen Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns on after the programmable controller CPU is in RUN status The initial settings are stored as the intelligent function module parameters After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the programmable controller CPU the initial setting is updated when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN If the QU71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the initial settings become effective when the remote I O station receives the information notifying the status change from STOP to RUN of the remote master station s programmable controller CPU At this time do not write data to the buffer memory using a sequence program and do not manipulate Y signals until Basic parameter setting existence X turns on If the initial setting data are written using a sequence program the initial setting values are written whe
201. etting of the port No for automatic communication function Review the setting of the target slave port No for automatic communication function Do not write data to the system area 0031H to OOF 1h of the buffer memory Review the setting of the CPU response monitoring timer When using GX Configurator MB switch the power on and then turn on Basic parameter setting request Y1 after Basic parameter setting existence X3 has turned on Review the setting of the port No for dedicated instruction Perform the basic parameter setting after completion of the dedicated instruction Review the setting of the device code MELSEC Q Occurrence 1 Continued on next page 11 25 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code MODBUS device upper limit value over error MODBUS device assigned range overlap error Buffer memory assigned range error Device upper limit value over error Target MODBUS devic e type specification error Response monitoring timer setting error Buffer memory address overlap error 11 26 The head MODBUS device number assignment points in the MODBUS device assignment parameter exceeds the maximum 65535 of the MODBUS device MODBUS device ranges set with the MODBUS device assignment parameters are overlapped COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR The assigned range of the QJ71MT91 buf
202. executed Execute the dedicated The dedicated instruction instruction after setting the cannot be executed due to basic parameters the offline mode Execute the dedicated Dedicated Since the QJ71MT91 on the instruction in the online mode 737A instruction main base unit of a COMERR IS use the dedicated execution redundant system have instruction in a redundant impossible been mounted the System mount the QJ71MT91 dedicated instruction cannot on the extension base unit and be executed When delete the setting of the mounting the QJ71MT91 on intelligent function module the main base unit of a Switch 5 redundant system the master function cannot be used e If an error has occurred in the CPU response The CPU response programmable controller CPU 7380 monitoring timer monitoring timer timed out in COM ERR remove the error time out the slave function Set a larger CPU response monitoring timer value The request message of the Confirm the sub code supported sub code not supported by by the QJ71MT91 slave 73824 Sub code error COM ERR the QJ71MT91 slave function function and review the request was received message to be sent J Set the MODBUS device The MODBUS device assignment parameters for the assignment parameters have MODBUS device specified in not been set for the the received request message MODBUS device specified Adjust the timing for the 7383H in the received request COM ERR request message t
203. f the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting has been completed Check if the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 is on Restart the automatic communication function after completing basic Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 5 2 1 parameter re setting Check the Automatic communication operation status storage area 0C20H to 0C23H in the buffer memory and identify the parameter number of the error cause Take corrective actions according to the Section 11 3 1 error code currently stored in the Automatic communication error code storage area 0C28H to 0C67H or the exception code sent from the target slave This section 1 3 When the slave function is not used the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA may be off Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters from GX Configurator MB or Section 7 4 Section 9 1 3 from the sequence program In the setting of intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting b1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method select OFF Start with the default parameters Refer to MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 Section 6 6 This section 2 6 turned on 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Seaside SII MELSEC Q Troubleshooting for system switching in a redundant system Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section The systems ar
204. f the latest error Number of errors occurred No 1 Detailed error code Exception code Function code Local station port No Target IP address Target device port No No 2 Detailed error code Exception code Function code Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Items Buffer memory Reference Monitor Item address section OCFEH Number of errors occurred 3326 Detailed error code ti error code Exception code Section 11 3 1 Function code ODOOH to ODFFH Error log 1 to 32 Local station port No 3328 to 3583 Target IP address Target device port No 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 5 Communication status Monitor Purpose Monitor the communication status by communication protocol Operating procedure Monitor Test screen Communication status Monitor Screen Communication status Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MTS1 Setting item Current value Setting value IP IP packet reception count Count of IP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent IP packets Simultaneous transmission error detection count ICMP ICMP packet reception count Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent ICMP packets T
205. fer memory set with the MODBUS device assignment parameters exceeds the set range of the user free area The head device number assignment points in the MODBUS device assignment parameter exceeds the maximum 65535 of the CPU device The setting of the target MODBUS device type specification in the automatic communication parameter is incorrect The setting of the response monitoring timer in the automatic communication parameter is outside the setting range The setting of the response monitoring timer in the automatic communication parameter is less than the setting of the split reception monitoring timer value The setting ranges of the buffer memory in the automatic communication parameter overlap between multiple parameters MELSEC Q Error Name Lit LED Corrective Action 3 1 Review the setting of the head MODBUS device number and assignment points Review the setting of the head MODBUS device number and assignment points Review the setting of the head device number and assignment points Review the setting of the head device number and assignment points Review the setting of the target MODBUS device type specification Review the setting of the response monitoring timer so that it falls within the setting range Make the response monitoring timer greater than the split reception monitoring timer value Correct the overlapping buffer memory settings Continued on next
206. for TCP connection opening for the 2 Any instructions attempted in excess of the limit are ignored MBREQ instructions does not exceed 8 3 this instruction is executed 4 in Execution type S1 0 of the control data subsequent instruction execution 5 Whether the MBREQ instruction is being executed or not and whether it is completed normally or not can be confirmed in the completion device D2 and completion status indication device D2 1 specified in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBREQ instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing b Completion status indication device D2 1 Turns ON OFF depending on the status of the MBREQ instruction completion Normal completion Error completion Operation for MBREQ instruction execution Remains OFF Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBREQ instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing indication device END END END END processing processing processing X processing Sequence program Csiiai ie Completion of MBREQ i ON instruction execution o p MBREO instruction eee ON Completion device OFF M0 e E o D2 1 Error 1 ON completion Nomal Completion status OFF l completion y D2 1 10 15 1 scan 10 15 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Error
207. for setting 9 8 MODBUS extended file register assignment Dust uiui bak Ma hal ek al ur Peed a ale t DL 7 31 MODBUS extended file register size 7 31 MODBUSS standard functions 4 1 Mask write register sssssss 4 19 Read CollS tones 4 6 Read discrete inputs ssssse 4 7 Read file record ssssssss 4 15 Read holding registers 4 8 Read input registers ssss 4 9 Read Write multiple registers 4 20 Write file record eee 4 17 Write multiple coils ssss 4 12 Write multiple registers 4 14 Write single coil sesse 4 10 Write single register 4 11 Index 3 MODBUS TCP setting 7 17 N O P Oo L0 CH I D sse 7 20 Monitor test ssi ipte uds 8 17 Multiple CPU system san 2 1 Network configuration sssss 2 3 Number of cascade connection stages 3 2 Number of errors occurred 11 18 Number of occupied I O points 3 2 Number of routers set 7 13 Number of routers that can be set 3 2 Online change enable disable setting 6 13 Ope
208. g fails ZP REMFR M Kl KI HO K3091 D3091 K3 M211 REMFR instruction completion M211 M212 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q t K Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference LI Handling of ZP REMFR REMFR REMFR Manual Remote I O Network instruction error instruction instruction LIII E completion result 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q lt lt Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer input area gt gt X1000 X1006 Z REMFR Jl K1 Ki HO K4352 D4096 K64 M300 J Refreshes automatic Module Automatic REMFR communication function buffer READY communication instruction n operation status completion input area e ne RON PREY TRAN TCI IR QN REEL TAN EORTC M300 M301 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q 1 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference H Handling of Z REMFR REMFR REMFR Manual Remote I O Network instruction error instruction instruction ACTES ESTRUM tM Krcr ee E ee 4 completion result Refresh processing Automatic communication operation status X1000 X1006 2 REMFR J1 K2 Kl HO K3104 D4092 K4 M320 Refreshes automatic ii Automatic i pees communication operation status communication instruction operation status completion storage area M320 M321 z At SET M322 Turns ON Normal processing REMFR REMFR Normal
209. g with GX Configurator MB input the head device 6 The extended data register D65536 and higher area and extended link register W10000 and higher area cannot be allocated as input register or holding register Use file register ZR specification instead For file register ZR specification of extended data register or extended link register refer to the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Use Read file record FC 20 or Write file record FC 21 in the above case 2 Head device number As the head device number set the head device number of the programmable controller CPU device memory or the head address of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS device 3 Head MODBUS device number Head coil number Head input number Head input register number Head holding register number a As the head MODBUS device number set the head number of the MODBUS device of the assignment target QJ71MT91 b Use the following expression to find the set value of the head MODBUS device number Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of MODBUS device number to be set 1 Example Set 5139 when the MODBUS device number is 105140 c The head MODBUS device number must not be duplicated in assignment 1 to 16 Set different head MODBUS device numbers The slave function of the QJ71MT91 is inactive if any of the device number settings are duplicated 4 Assignment points As the assi
210. ge value of each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save the set values Setting Item Buffer memory Reference address section i 0900H 09014 Head device number 2305 0902H 2306 0903H 2307 ee ee Same as in coil assignment 1 09044 to 093FH m i 2308 to 2367 me Device Head device number Dum H 2369 0942H 2370 0943H 2371 Coil assignment 1 Head coil number Assignment points Input assignment 1 Head Head input number number Assignment points Input assignment 2 to Same as in input assignment 1 0944u to 097FH 16 P 9 2372 to 2431 Section 7 4 Device code d i 2432 Device 1 0981H 2433 assignment 1 0982H Head device number device number Input register Head input register number 2434 0983H 2435 Input register Same as in input register assignment 1 999 trto OBEN assignment 2 to 16 put reg 9 2436 to 2495 09C0H 2496 Device 1 Assignment points 09C1H Holding register 2497 assignment 1 09C2H Head holding register number 2498 09C3H 2499 Holding register Same as in holding register assignment 1 cee OSER assignment 2 to 16 9188 g 2500 to 2559 1 QJ71MT91 buffer memory user free area 5000H to 5FFFu setting When the MODBUS device is the input register or holding register the QJ71MT91 buffer memory user free area setting is available For setting enter a value as a hexadecimal constant as sh
211. get device cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 3 4 GX Developer Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on 1 i When using the TCP protocol check Set the necessary number of TCP whether the set number of TCP connections for GX Developer y i Section 7 2 3 connections for GX Developer connection 0030u and re set the basic connection is O or not parameter Check the GX Developer connection Correct the GX Developer connection pe setup screen settings setup screen settings if it has a problem Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made even though each parameter setting is completed 3 5 Error log has Refer to the error log area OCFEu to ODFFu and confirm the error code action Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 3 6 4 6 6 11 8 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action 3 Section Communication with target device cannot be made even though each parameter setting is completed Check the local station IP address intelligent function module switch 3 4 Check the intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition If necessary correct the setting and reset the CPU Section 6 6 If necessary correct the setting and reset the CPU Section 6 6 Check
212. gnment points set the device points of the programmable controller CPU device memory or QJ71MT91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS device The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response to the master if the master requests access to a device outside the programmable controller CPU range or to outside the user free area of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 4 3 Default assignment parameters Coil 000001 to 065536 Y 8192 0 to 1FFF NES Coil assignment 1 M 8192 0 to 8191 Wate Coil assignment 2 SM 2048 0 to 2047 y Coil assignment 3 F 2048 0 to 2047 Coil a signment 6 SB 2048 0to 7FF po Coll assignment 7 V 2048 0 to 2047 p Coil assignment 8 TC 2048 0 to 2047 Coil assignment 10 I FILE S TS MAU SO CN 2048 0 to 2047 DONDE Coil assignment 11 SC 2048 0 to 2047 CRM Coil assignment 12 SS 2048 0 to 2047 qoo Coil assignment 13 CC 2048 0 to 2047 Coil assignment 14 1 furi CS woe eee TT 2048 0 to 2047 Coil assignment 15 MELSEC Q As the MODBUS device assignment parameters default assignment parameters are available as initial values To use the default assignment parameters Bit 1 of the communication condition setting switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches must be set to OFF Refer to Section 6 6 for details of the intelligent function module switches The following shows how the MODBUS devices are assig
213. gnostics function The H W Information screen can be confirmed on GX Developer 8 29F or later Starting Procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information H W Information H W Information Module Display format Module Name QJ71MT91 Product information 06011 0000000000 B e HEX C DEC H W LED Information HAW SW Information Item Value Item Value Stop monitor Display Data The QJ71MT91 data stored in the following buffer memory areas are displayed Display Data Corresponding Buffer Memory Area Left side of HAV LED Information Module status LED status 1 2 3 0C054 3077 1 C2 Intelligent function SETTING _ module switch 4 IP ADD H IP ADD L DUO INFO Switch 5 Redundant settings status 0C04n 3076 1 LED status structure b15tob5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Off je OPEN LED ERR LED COM ERR LED 2 Refer to Section 11 1 for troubleshooting of the H W LED 3 Refer to Section 11 4 for how to turn off the COM ERR LED 4 Refer to Section 6 6 for details of the intelligent function module switches 11 14 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 Error Codes 11 3 1 Error code storage areas The error code of each error is stored into any of the following buffer memory areas Error Type Storage Area Name Address 0C10H 3088 Automatic communi
214. h error has occurred correct the switch setting and then switch the power OFF then ON or reset the programmable controller CPU x2 When setting parameters by GX Configurator MB set 1 to both bO and b1 a Basic parameter starting method Bit 0 Set the basic parameters for the time when the power is turned ON from OFF When corresponding bit is OFF The QJ71MT91 starts up with its default basic parameters and starts communication When corresponding bit is ON The QJ71MT91 starts up with the basic parameters set using a sequence program or GX Configurator MB and starts communication However the user set basic parameters are not registered to the QJ71MT91 until the following operation is performed When a sequence program was used to set the basic parameters Turn ON Basic parameter setting request Y 1 When GX Configurator MB was used to set the basic parameters After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the programmable controller CPU the initial setting is updated when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN 1 Make this setting ON when a sequence program or GX Configurator MB is used to set the basic parameters 2 If no basic parameters have been set with this setting ON the master function slave function and GX Developer connection function do not operate Refe
215. he MODBUS device and the number of points to be read from the MODBUS device b The access points change depending on the type specification of the target MODBUS device Type Specification of the Target MODBUS Device Access Points Setting Range Read target Write target Points to be read Points to be written 01004 1 to 2000 points 0200H 1 to 2000 points Not specified 0400H Input register 1 to 125 points Ho wm 0500H Holding register 1 to 125 points fp el 0001H wise OO Col 1to1968 points Not Notepecied 0005H Holding register t ae 1 to 123 points 0505H Holding register Holding register 1 to 125 points 1 to 121 points In the access to the bit device coil input of the slave the fraction bits are handled as described below 1 Bit device read Automatic communication parameter Read setting Type specification of the Head buffer memory Target MODBUS device i Access points target MODBUS device address head number 0200H Input 1000H 16628 lt QJ71MT91 buffer memory Target slave device area 116629 to bO 116640 to 116625 116656 to 116641 116672 to 116657 Remaining area is masked with 0 2 Bit device write target MODBUS device address head number lt QJ71MT91 buffer memory gt lt Target slave device area gt Write 001306 bO bF be e 001312 to 00129
216. he routing information c Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 Module ID a Set the module ID when specifying the slave connected to the other line such as a line using the MODBUS Serial protocol b The module ID is embedded into a request message to be sent to a target slave device Refer to Section 4 2 for the frame specifications of the request message Repeat interval timer value a The repeat interval timer value represents the time from when the QJ71MT91 receives a response message from the slave until it sends a next message to the slave b Overlap of send and receive processings may cause delay and take more time than the interval time set to the repeat interval timer c The initial value is O When the repeat interval timer value is 0 the QJ71MT91 will issue a next request message immediately after it has received a response message from the slave If unable to do so check the time until that the slave station can process the next request message After that set the above time or more of a value to the repeat interval timer value d The accuracy of the repeat interval timer is 0 to 10ms Response monitoring timer value a The response monitoring timer value represents the time from when the QJ71MT91 issues a request message to the slave until it receives a response
217. hether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Perform the basic parameter setting processing after the send receive processing is over Retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error If this occurs at execution of the dedicated instruction set TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion in the close option of the execution type If the number of connections used exceeds the maximum 64 bring it within the range Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Retry after a little while Perform the basic parameter setting processing after the send receive processing is over Continued on next page 11 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q rror Name escription i orrective Action Code Error during close Transmission through the connection being closed was processing attempted Open failure Alive check failure KeepAlive function Failed to open the TCP connection for the request message transmission 73D8u 73D9u 73DAH Since the normal connection resources were all being used anew TCP connection could not be opened Since the existence of the target device could not be confirmed by the KeepAlive function the TCP connection was
218. his case however the Write file record is not performed When performing the Write file record previously confirm whether the programmable controller CPU file register ZR is writable 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 11 Mask write register FC 22 Masks the value stored in one holding register with AND or OR and writes the masked value Number of accessible devices with one message The masked value is written to the holding register as described below Target register s current value N AND mask value U OR mask value N AND mask value write value When the OR mask value is 0000 only the AND processing of the AND mask value is performed When the AND mask value is 0000H the OR mask value becomes the write value 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Target holding register number AND mask value OR mask value 160 00008 to FFFFH 0000H to FFFFH 00001 to FFFFH L 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 96H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details This function code reads the value stored in the holding reg
219. hout the MODBUS TCP interface via the MODBUS serial gateway etc When the destination of the request message is the MODBUS serial gateway Module ID the set values are as described below 0 to 255 User 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 Station number of MODBUS serial slave Set 255 when the destination of the request message is the slave having the MODBUS TCP interface Sameizis nmt Specify the port No of the target slave 0 s B 0 Sent to No 502 11065535 User 1 to 65535 Sent to the set port No 3 Specify the time for monitoring a response from the target device slave 500ms Response increments 0 monitoring timer 0 60 30s 2 to 2400 User value 2 to 2400 Set value Response monitoring timer value Set value X 500ms 1 Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 2 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The programmable controller CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 9 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal When the close option setting of the execution type S1 0 is TCP connection is closed after instruction completion TCP connection is closed after the dedicated instruction has been completed and the completio
220. icated instructions supported by the QJ71MT91 Dedicated e i Description Reference Instruction Reads and writes the MODBUS device data from and to MBRW Section 10 2 the slave Communicates with the slave in the request message MBREQ Section 10 3 format of any PDU protocol data unit Interlock for dedicated instruction execution Execute the dedicated instruction with the I O signals in the following status X0 x3 XO Module READY Dedicated pM al neiud H X3 Basic parameter setting existence Until completion of the dedicated instruction execution do not change the data control data argument etc specified for the dedicated instruction 2 Available devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal devices 1 File register Bit Word X Y M L F V B T ST C D W 1 Word device bit designation can be used as bit data Word device bit designation is done by designating Word device Bit No Designation of bit numbers is done in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is designated as DO A However there can be no bit designation for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C 10 1 10 1 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 Z P MBRW With this instruction the MODBUS device data are read from and written to the slave Usable Devices Internal device Link direct device Intel
221. ication status of each station No SB20 Module status Program for parameter setting and automatic communication function Refer to b in this section Set the following value in the timer constant K Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Sequence scan time x 4 or more Parameter communication status Sequence scan time X 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Reason To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise or other condition Note that x 4 and x 3 represent standard values For details of the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O station of MLESECNET H refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 9 PROGRAMMING b Program example for parameter setting and automatic communication function MELSEC Q After execution of the REMTO REMFR instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Basic parameter setting X20 X1000 A FMOvP HO DO H1D4 Initializes basic parameter Parameter Module creation area setting READY command s K60 DO TCP ULP timer value E wwe K200 Di TCP zero window timer value WP K20 02 TCP resend timer value s t 40 D3 TCP end timer value F irrrve 10 D4 IP reassembly timer value MP K60 D5
222. ication function 0112 to 0113 System area use prohibited 274 to 275 MODBUS CPU response monitoring timer value TCP Set time set value X 500ms 0115 to setting 0116 IP address 277 to 278 Preferred node specification 1 Section Number of 7 2 connections Basic parameter 0118 to 01D 4 Preferred node specification 2 Same as preferred node H 280 to 468 to 64 specification 1 01D5 to O1FF System area use prohibited 469 to 511 0200 to 0201 Target station IP address 00000000 R W 512 to 513 0202 255 514 aA Did 0203 Repeat interval timer value 515 Set time set value X 10ms 0204 Response check timer value 516 Set time set value X 500ms 0205 i 5 17 Sere Target MODBUS device type specification 0000 0206 cation 0000 518 Automatic parameter Head butler memory address Section 7 3 0207 communi 1 Read settin Target MODBUS device 519 cation 9 head number 0208 parameter A ini 520 ccess points 0209 521 i Head buffer memory address 0000 020A 2 a Target MODBUS device 522 Write setting head number bile 020B Automatic 020C to communi O4FF cation Same as automatic communication parameter 1 524 to 1279 parameter 2to64 0500 to 08FF System area use prohibited 1280 to 2303 Continued on next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q miil Reference Address Application Name Initial Value i Setting Section ER CC RENE Pe Co
223. ication target Set a MODBUS TCP master device as the communication target device temporarily TCP connections with the nodes not specified as preferred ones may be disconnected automatically when the connection resources become Section 3 1 Section 7 2 insufficient Specify the nodes as preferred ones when necessary Reduce the number of simultaneously connected connections 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Communication Check if the total number of TCP As the connection resources are all with target device connections specified for use with assigned to the preferred nodes the cannot be made preferred nodes is within 64 other nodes cannot communicate even though each Delete the unnecessary preferred node parameter setting specifications is completed Section 7 2 Communication Check the target device Take corrective action if the target interval time with e Check for errors device has any problem Check whether the target device is ready for operation communication Check the line status Correct the line status if it has any function is longer problem in traffic than time setto Check for any TCP connection Check that the target device is the repeat interval disconnected automatically by the operating normally Section 5 4 timer KeepAlive function Adjust the KeepAlive start timer value Section 7 2 Dedicated and KeepAliv
224. iction on the assignment range of the MODBUS device assignment function Refer to Section 7 4 2 for details 4 When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on the main base unit of a redundant system the master function cannot be used 5 For details of the redundant system function refer to the QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 5 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 Master Function MELSEC Q This section explains the functions of the QJ71MT91 as a master of MODBUS TCP 5 2 1 Automatic communication function The automatic communication function allows device read write request messages to be automatically issued from the QJ71MT91 to the MODBUS TCP compatible slave devices g Ethernet SO MODBUSS TCP slave device E Eg Third party remote I O etc Holding register G Programmable ilis Ae CPU QJ71MT91 Master function po MODBUS TCP slave device Y Third party sensor etc Device memory Buffer memory 100ms read Holding register 250ms read Auto refresh 1000ms read 2 100ms write T e ee E MODBUSQG TCP slave device i 1 Third party programmable n controller Holding register MODBUS device read write request messages are issued to the slave repeatedly at specified intervals To use automatic communication function Set the automatic communication parameters to use this function Refer to Section 7
225. ide send Request message data write side write direction output area data read 30004 to 3FFFuH direction Ethernet 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Data transfer between automatic communication function buffer areas and programmable controller CPU device memory Data can be transferred between the automatic communication buffer area and programmable controller CPU device memory by either of the following methods Transfer Method Transfer by auto refresh setting Transfer by auto refresh Make the auto refresh setting with GX Configurator MB Refer setting to Section 8 5 sequence program sequence program to make transfer For details of the intelligent function module device refer to the QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 2 2 Dedicated instructions Used in a sequence program to read write the MODBUS device data etc at any timing MODBUS TCP slave device QJ71MT91 Programmable Master function controller CPU Command H 4z MBRW Holding register Request message holding register 400500 read request 1234u Response message holding register 400500 1234n Ethernet 1 dz SSS Dedicated instruction list The list of the dedicated instructions supported by the QJ71MT91 is indicated below Dedicated A Description Reference Instruc
226. il Head device number 0902 assignment os oa 0904 to Coil 093F assignment Same as coil assignment 1 2308 to 2367 2 to 16 Input Head device number assignment 1 Head input number Assignment points 0944 to Input 097F assignment Same as input assignment 1 2372 to 2431 MODBUS 2 to 16 device Section Device code assignment arameter Input Head device number register i t coi d Head input register number Assignment points Same as input register assignment 1 Input OS 10 register COB EE assignment 2436 to 2495 2 to 16 ess 09C4 to Holding H O9FF register 2500 to 2559 assignment 2 to 16 0A00 to OBFF System area use prohibited 2560 to 3071 3073 function status function Section 3074 status switch status Sitch Section 0C03 setting Switch 4 Local station IP address setting Same as holding register assignment 1 Continued on next page 3 7 3 7 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial Reference Address Application Name Initial Value Write eek 1 Section Section 0C05 Module LED ON 6 3 3077 status PED ON stan status Section 11 2 0CO06 to OCOF System area use prohibited 3078 to 3087 0C10 B d 3088 asic parameter error code storage area 0C11 Automatic communication parameter error 3089 code storage area 0C124 Automatic communication parameter setting 3090 Parameter result storage area Section 0013 e
227. iled module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had be
228. ion 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 9 Read file record FC 20 SC 06 Reads the values of one or more extended file registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 124 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub request 1 Function code Reference File number Read head device number Read points 149 of bytes number 0000n to FFFFx 0000 to 270Fu n1 S mXx7 064 00014 to 007C4 It Number of bytes mx7 Sub request m ee Reference File number Read head device number Read points number 0000n to FFFFx 00001 to 270Fx nm 064 00011 to 007C4 Number of bytes mX7 The upper limit of the file number available for the QJ71MT91 slave function is equal to the file register size of the mounted programmable controller CPU Refer to Section 7 4 4 a Specify the number of sub requests m so that the PDU protocol data unit size in the request message does not exceed 253 bytes 2 mxX7 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the request message is discarded b Specify the total read points of all the sub requests N n1 nm so that the PDU protocol data unit size in the request message does not exceed 253 bytes 2 mxX2 N X2 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the slave returns an exception response 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUN
229. ion 2 The subnet address of the router is the same as that of the local station QJ71MT91 Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 1 The router relay function is not needed for communication when the slave function of the QJ71MT91 is used to make communication with the master device on another Ethernet 2 The router relay function is not needed in a system that uses the Proxy router 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 2 3 GX Developer connection information setting 1 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection a TCP connections for GX Developer connection represents connections for connecting GX Developer using the TCP protocol Set the desired number to the Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection b TCP connections for GX Developer connection are handled as preferred connections c When GX Developer is connected using the UDP protocol no setting is required for the Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 2 4 MODBUS TCP setting 1 Local slave station port No Set the port No on the QJ71MT91 side for receiving a request message from the master using the slave function of the QJ71MT91 1 The specifications of the MODBUS TCP protocol define that 502 should be used as the port No for the slave In this setting the default value is 502 and normally need not be changed 2 When specifying a value of 32768
230. ion operation status for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 J Refreshes automatic communication function buffer output area 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 System configuration A program will be explained as an example to realize the following specifications for the setting target QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 Remote master station Station No 0 v E GX Developer MELSECNET H Remote I O network Network No 1 Setting target y esee den pun ee nehm mns 1 Remote I O station QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP master device Station No 1 192 1 0 1 192 1 0 3 v Ethernet H N ly in a A A A QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 5 192 1 0 6 192 1 0 2 1 This QJ71MT91 is assumed to be mounted in Slot O of the base unit with the head l O No set to 0 PR RAMMIN dabas 2 MELSEC Q a Automatic communication function The setting target QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 and MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 communicate with each other using the automatic communication function Set the automatic communication parameters to the setting target QJ71MT91 Communication details MELSECNET H remote master station
231. ister from the slave and after AND OR processing in the master writes the masked value to the holding register of the slave Therefore when the holding register value is changed during AND OR processing the new value is overwritten 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 12 Read Write multiple registers FC 23 Reads and writes data from and to multiple holding registers Write is executed first and read is then executed Number of accessible devices with one message Read 1 to 125 points Write 1 to 121 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Data Function code Read head holding Read points Write head holding Write points Number Write device data Write device data 17H register number n register number m 1 of bytes 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 007DH 0000H to FFFFH 0001H to 0079H mx 2 1 Tt Number of bytes m X 2 gt x1 The number of points specified as the write points must be matched with the number of bytes H L 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of bytes Read device data son Read device data 178 nx2 Number of bytes nx2 i Function code Exception 97H code 2 2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more
232. iteflerecord 100122 1 Nocombination setting other than the above is allowed for the type specification of the target MODBUS device S1 8 2 Simultaneous execution of read and write with a single instruction is allowed only for 0505u Read Write Multiple Registers 3 Read file record FC 20 and Write file record FC 21 allows access to multiple areas in one communication however only one area is accessible in one communication when using this dedicated instruction 1 When the close option setting of the execution type S1 0 is TCP connection is closed after instruction completion TCP connection is closed after the dedicated instruction has been completed and the completion device D2 has turned ON If the dedicated instruction is executed again for the same target device during this TCP connection closing processing it is completed with an error When the execution interval of the dedicated instruction for the same target device is Short set the close option to TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 2 Specify device number 1 as the device number However this does not apply to the file number and device number specified for the Read write file record 3 When access is made to the bit device coil input of the slave the fraction bit is handled as described below Read When the read access points are 35 points Read data storing device D1 gt lt Target slave
233. l Bit 4 User 02u Input 04 Input register Refer to 6 05x Holding register Word 07u Extended file register Read data 1 12 Set the word size of the read data stored in the argument D1 and later o sytem storage size Correspond Specify the file number when the target MODBUS device is the extended file 0 to 65535 RES 3 5b ing file number register PI Specify the head number of the write target MODBUS device Target As the device head number specify the lower 5 digits of actual device number MODBUS 1 0 to 65535 i With the exception of the file number and device number of the extended file 9 9 User Read setting o 2 wo T EA register Example Specify 31 when accessing the input 400032 Set the write points of the MODBUS device Use the following unit to set the access points Type specification of the target M Setting Access points that can be set MODBUS device WU 02u Input 04u Input register Refer to 6 05u Holding register Word 07H Extended file register Set the word size of the write data stored in the argument S2 and later Set 1 when performing read only When the access target MODBUS device type specification of the target MODBUS device is 01u Coil or 02x Input pay attention to the following 1 to 125 User Set the access points 16 rounded up to the nearest integer When the number of write points is a fraction the excess area is ig
234. lf duplex communication mode according to the hub type However for connection with the hub that does not have the auto negotiation function set the half duplex communication mode on the hub side Hub 1 Uu BE Twisted pair cable n a a E Target device i EE a lt Pi z SIS Dn JL A i i QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP slave device MODBUS TCP master device 1 For the number of cascade connection stages refer to the Section 3 1 Use the devices that comply with the IEEE802 3 100BASE TX 10BASE T Standard 1 Hub and other equipment a Shielded twisted pair cable 1 For 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable Category 5 2 For 10BASE T Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable Category 3 4 5 A straight cable can be used We do not guarantee proper operation if a crossing cable is used for the 100BASE TX 10BASE T connection between the QJ71MT91 and the target device b RJ45 jack c Hub for 100Mbps 10Mbps network In high speed communication 100Mbps by the 100BASE TX connection a communication error may occur under the influence of high frequency noise from devices other than the programmable controller in the installation environment Take the following action on the QJ71MT91 side to prevent the influence of high frequency noise in the construction of a network system 1 Wiring connection Do not install a twisted pain cable together with the mai
235. ligent f Constant Set Data System user JEN function module Index register File register Others device Bit Word K H U AG fey oOo 4p a G ee ee o a 9 Instruction symbol Execution condition Command aed CO ba ZP MBRW Un S1 D1 S2 D2 ZP MBRW 1 1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Set data Set data Setting Setting Side Data Type Un Head I O number of module i n ser OOH to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation S1 Head number of device where control data are stored BIN 16 bits D1 i Read data storing device System S2 7 Write data storing device Device turned ON one scan on completion of the instruction D2 System D2 1 also turns ON for error completion 2 The setting side is as described below User Dataare set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The programmable controller CPU stores the result of dedicated 10 instruction execution 3 Specify a dummy device if OOH No specification is selected in the Type specification of the target MODBUS device S1 8 The local device and program based file register are not available as the devices used for set data 10 2 10 2 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
236. ligent function module switch 1 H W Information mite Stop monitor Close 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Display Data Module The following data are displayed Module Name Mounted module model name I O Address Head I O signal number of the target module Implementation Position Slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information The alphabet at the end of the production information indicates the function version of the module Function version of the QJ71MT91 is available from B Example The product information that ends with B indicates that the module is of function version B Module access Displays Enable when Module READY X0 is on and Watch dog timer error X1F is off Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether the module parameter set by the user matches the actually mounted module or not Error Display Displays the 16 latest error codes stored in the error log area of the buffer memory Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error Refer to Section 11 3 for the error code Error contents Disposal Displays the error contents and disposal for the error code selected in Error Display Display of the contents and disposal is available on GX Developer Version 8 29F or later 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q b When confirming the LED status and switch setting status on the H W Information screen of the dia
237. low Intelligent Function Setting Details Set Value Module Switch Switch 1 No need to set initial value online Basic parameter starting method Start with the user set parameters bO 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method i Start with the user set parameters b1 1 Switch 2 i Online change enable disable setting Online change enabled b2 1 Send frame specification Data are sent in Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame b3 0 Switch 3 Set the upper half of the IP address C001H Switch 4 Set the lower half of the IP address 0001u Switch 5 No need to set 1 Set 0006 to start with the default basic parameters 2 Set 00054 to start with the default MODBUS device assignment parameters 3 Set 0004u to start with the default basic and MODBUS device assignment parameters 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters using a sequence program Parameter setting can be omitted under the following conditions Parameter Setting Omitting Condition Parameter Setting method With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the basic parameter starting method bit Basic parameters Use the default parameters 1 i 0 to 0 Start with the default parameters Refer to 1 in this section Automatic communication Do not use the automatic communication No need to set parameters function master function With the intelligent f
238. lue Units 500ms IP reassembly timer value Units 500ms Split reception monitoring timer value Units 500ms Keep live Details Decimal input Setting range 2 2400 Make text file End setup Cancel When the basic parameter screen is displayed it shows the initial values 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Automatic communication parameters Set the automatic communication parameters on the Automatic communication parameter screen Set the values shown in Section 9 2 1 2 b Automatic communication parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Setting value Automatic communication parameter 1 192 1 0 2 Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Units 10ms Response monitoring timer value Units 500ms Type specification of the target MODBLIS R device Read coils Read setting Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS R device head number Details IP Address input Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Make text file End setup Cancel c MODBUS device assignment parameters Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters on the MODBUS R device assignment parameter screen Set the values shown in Section 9 2 1 2 c MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name Q
239. mber 0000H to FFFFH device number mx7 06H Sub request m o o Reference File number Write head Write points Device data number 0000H to FFFFH device number nm Device data 06H 0000H to 270FH 0001H to 007AH Number of bytes m X 7 The upper limit of the file number available for the QJ71MT91 slave function is equal to the file register size of the mounted programmable controller CPU Refer to Section 7 4 4 a Specify the total write points of all the sub requests N n1 nm so that the size of the PDU protocol data unit in the request message does not exceed 253 bytes 2 mx7 N X2 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the request message is discarded 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code 954 Exception code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details Even if the slave QJ71MT91 receives this function with the programmable controller CPU file register ZR set as read only for example the storage location of the file register ZR is a Flash card the slave responds normally In t
240. mbly timer value Set time set value X 500ms 1 to 2399 10 0005H 5 Split reception monitoring timer value Set time set value x 500ms 2 to 2400 00064 6 0007H 7 KeepAlive KeepAlive start timer value Set time set value x 500ms 0 Not used 1 Used 1 to 32767 KeepAlive 0008u 8 KeepAlive interval timer value Set time set value x 500ms 1 to 32767 0009 9 KeepAlive resend count 1 to 10 000AH 10 Router relay function 0 Not used 1 Used 000BH to 000CH 11 to 12 000Du to 000EH 13 to 14 Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address C0000000h to FFFFFFFCH Refer to Section 7 2 2 3 c FFFFFFOOH 00000000H 000Fu Routing 15 information Number of routers set 0to8 0010H to 00114 16 to 17 0012u to 0013H 18 to 19 0014H to 002FH 20 to 47 Subnet address Refer to Section 7 2 2 3 e 00000000H Router information 1 Router information 2 to 8 Router IP address Refer to Section 7 2 2 3 f Same as router information 1 00000000H 7 PARAMETER SETTING 2 GX Developer connection information setting Setting Range Initial Value MELSEC Q 0030 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection Address 0110H 272 3 MODBUS TCP setting Parameter Name Local slave station port No Setting Range 1 to 4999 5020 to 65535
241. message from the slave b If the QJ71MT91 does not receive a response message from the slave before the response monitoring timer expires it judges the target slave as faulty When an error status occurs the corresponding automatic communication operation status storage area in the buffer memory turns on in the QJ71MT91 Also the error code is stored in the automatic communication error code storage area Refer to Section 11 3 1 for details of the automatic communication operation status storage area and automatic communication error code storage area c When the response monitoring timer value is 0 the QJ71MT91 operates at 60 30s 7 20 7 PARAMETER SETTING Type Specification of the Target MODBUS Device Set value Read target Write target 01004 0200H 02 Read discrete inputs Not specified 1 0400H Input device Read input registers 0500H Holding register Read holding registers MELSEC Q 5 Type specification of the target MODBUS device a Set the type of the read write target MODBUS device b15 b8 b7 bO Read target Write target Set Value Target MODBUS Device Type 00H Not specified Coi input O 04n Input register Holding register b Setting range The following table gives the combinations of read and write targets available for the target MODBUS device type setting Any other combinations are not available Issued Function Code 0001H Write multiple coils
242. mmable controller CPU Q25HCPU parameters USB RS 232 A Intelligent function module B Data saved by Make text file MELSEC Q button on the initial Personal computer Figure 8 1 Correlation chart for data created with the utility package 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 3 2 Operation overview GX Developer screen E PROGRAM LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step ime Window Help Check program Merge data Check parameter Transfer ROM LI Delete unused comments Clear all parameters IC memory card gt SetTEL data gt l Intelligent Function utility 3 Utility list 7 Customize keys Change display color Options Create start up setting file R Tools Intelligent function utility Start Select a target intelligent function module screen Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW QJ E fE X Intelligent Function module parameter Online Tools Help Select a target intelligent function module Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MTS1 Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start D No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh 4 DOOO GJ7TMTST ailab Unavailable Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Refer to Section 8 3 3 Enter Start I O No and
243. n status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Review the TCP ULP timer value of the basic parameter Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while In the preferred node specification specify the target device with which communication is made frequently Decrease the number of TCP connections used simultaneously Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Continued on next page 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Occurrence ipti i iv i code 2 The host address bits of the IP Correct the target IP address set IP address address of the request to the dedicated instruction s vee COM ERR setting error message transmission control data or automatic destination are all 0 or all 1 communication parameter Check whether the operation The connection not open was
244. n 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 2 Read discrete inputs FC 02 Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more inputs Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 2000 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head input number Read points 024 00004 to FFFFau 00014 to O7D01 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data UU Device data 024 read bytes 1 n n Number of read bytes n gt Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Device data 1 Bit device storage order Device data n The read input statuses are stored in order from low order to high order bits When the number of read points is not a multiple of 8 the excess bits turn to 0 When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 82H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Read holding registers FC 03 Reads the values of one or more holding registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 125 points 1 Request message format Master Slave F
245. n 6 6 Take the corresponding corrective action and retry Section 7 4 Section 11 3 Take the corresponding corrective action and retry Section 7 3 Section 11 3 Take the corresponding corrective action and retry ry Section 7 4 Section 11 3 Set the automatic communication Section 7 3 Section 9 1 2 parameters and activate it from GX Configurator MB or from the sequence Refer to Automatic communication parameter SEUD error completed X5 turned on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on This section aUa Refer to Basic parameter setting error 2 3 completed X2 turned on This section 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 5 Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action 3 Section Check the automatic communication Restart the automatic communication Section 7 3 stop request function Section 5 2 1 Automatic communication operation status X6 turned off Automatic communication error status X7 turned on COM ERR LED status X1B turned on MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA does not turn on 11 4 Check whether the basic parameters were re set while the automatic communication function was active The automatic communication is stopped when the basic parameters are Check if the communication with the target device is possible Refer to COM ERR LED turned on Check whether the slave function is used or not Check i
246. n circuit and power cables etc Place the twisted pair cable in a duct 2 Communication system Increase the number of communication retries if necessary Change the hub used for connection into a 10Mbps hub and make communication at a transmission speed of 10Mbps 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 3 System Configuration and Access Range This section provides the system configurations using the QJ71MT91 1 The target devices available for communication with the QJ71MT91 are the following two kinds of devices Master slave device supporting the MODBUS TCP protocol Personal computer running GX Developer 1 Ethernet devices can also be installed on the Ethernet line where the MODBUS TCP system exists However communication with the QJ71MT91 is not available 1 Basic system configuration MODBUS TCP communication Third party programmable QJ71MT91 controller User application HMI Master slave function Master Master Master E Dn p M E Boj E 3 _ Ethernet m m EEEEEHBEEEEEEEREEEHEEEEREEEHEEEEERHEESEREEEEEEENNEN EE m B A i n m L MODBUS TCP 0 X E ial gat
247. n data in text file format End setup Saves the set data and ends the operation Cancel Cancels the setting and ends the operation 1 The auto refresh settings are stored in an intelligent function module parameter file After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the programmable controller CPU the automatic refresh setting is updated when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP Switch set to RUN The auto refresh settings cannot be changed from the sequence programs However processing equivalent to auto refresh can be added using the FROM TO instruction in the sequence program 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 Monitor Test Monitor Test Purpose From this screen start the monitoring or test of the operating status I O signals parameter setting status automatic communication status error log communication status of the QJ71MT91 and perform PING test Operating procedure Select monitor test module screen Start I O No Module type gt Module model name Monitor Test Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal The screen can also be started from System monitor of GX Developer Version 6 or later Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual for details Monitor Test Screen Monitor Test Module information Module typ
248. n device D2 has turned ON If the dedicated instruction is executed again for the same target device during this TCP connection closing processing it is completed with an error When the execution interval of the dedicated instruction for the same target device is short set the close option to TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 10 12 10 12 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Request message storing devices Setting Setting Device Item Set Data zr Range Side Request message S2 0 size byte Set the size of the request message to be sent in byte units 1 to 253 User ize by Set the contents function code data of the request message to be sent Example When a request message to read the data of holding registers 440001 to 440002 is sent by Read holding registers FC 03 lt Frame of request message to be sent gt Function code Function code Head holding register number Read points 03H 9CH 40H 03H Sending order 5 bytes lt Contents stored in request message storing devices and their order gt As described Request message b15 b8 b7 bO lt S2 0 gt Request message size on the left 5 bytes bO lt S2 1 gt lt S2 2 gt Request message b15 b8 b7 lt S2 3 gt 00n Ignored 02H Send data storage order data Send data storage order order Request message is sent in order of low order to high order bytes starting
249. n indicates a TCP split transmission count which is obtained from the following calculation Message size sent by QJ71MT91 nz n Maximum Segment size rounded up to nearest integer 2 Refer to Section 7 3 for the CPU response monitoring timer value Example 1 TCP split transmission count for communication on the same line The Maximum Segment size is 1460 bytes on the same line with no router relayed and the TCP split transmission count is as described below When QJ71MT91 send message size S 1460 bytes n 1 When 1460 bytes QJ71MT91 send message size n 2 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Example 2 TCP split transmission count for communication on the other line The Maximum Segment size is a minimum of 536 bytes on the other line e g via a dial up router and the TCP split transmission count is as described below When QJ71MT91 transmission message size S 536 bytes n 1 When 536 bytes lt QJ71MT91 transmission message size S 1072 bytes n 2 When 1072 bytes lt QJ71MT91 transmission message size S 1608 bytes n 3 3 When a communication error occurs due to noise etc change the setting to increase the retry count The retry count is determined by the following expression In the case of the default value 2 60 20 1 Retry _ TCP ULP timer value j count 7 TCP resend timer value m 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 2 KeepAlive function a KeepAlive 1 Setwhether the KeepAlive function
250. n order starting from the first target device 1 Setthe network address of the target device when the class network address of the local station QJ71MT91 differs from that of the target device 2 Setthe subnet address of the target device when the class network address of the local station QJ71MT91 is the same as that of the target device 7 PARAMETER SETTING 3 Subnet address setting examples Local station QJ71MT91 Class B IP address 81052F01H 129 5 47 1 Subnet mask FFFFFC00n 255 255 252 0 TII possubesccssescctece ne Ethernet 4 Router 2 Router 3 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 3 Setting example 1 Setting example 2 Setting example 3 Target device 1 Target device 2 Target device 3 Class B Class A Class B IP address 810440011 IP address 710440011 IP address 81052902u 129 4 64 1 113 4 64 1 129 5 41 2 Setting example 1 When the network addresses of the local station QJ71MT91 and target device differ Network address Local station QJ71MT91 IP address Class B Target device 1 IP address Class B 81H 04H 40H 01H 1 o o o o o o 4 o o o o o 1 o o o 1 o o o o o o o o o o o o o 1 Set the network address of the target device 1 Network address
251. n parameter setting result storage area Automatic communication start request Not requested Being requested X05 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed OFF X05 Automatic communication operation status Stopped Automatic communication stop request Not requested Being requested Parameters 1 Automatic communication operation status storage area E X07 Automatic communication error status X08 MDDBUS R device assignment parameter OFF Automatic communication error code storage area Flash ROM setting Current value display Make test file Stop monitor Details Cannot execute test Refer to Section 8 6 1 8 19 Monitoring Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text fle Stop monitor Refer to Section 8 6 3 Details Cannot execute test Monitoring 8 19 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB Error log Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Curent value Setting value The error logis displayed in order of the latest error Number of errors occurred No 1 Detailed error code Exception code Function code Local station port No Target IP address Target device port No No 2 Detailed eror code Exception code Function code Flash ROM setting D
252. n the CPU module switches from STOP to RUN status Therefore perform programming so that the initial setting will be re executed in the sequence program The parameter setting by sequence program has priority over the parameter setting by initial setting when both of them are used 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting Purpose Make this setting to store the QJ71MT91 buffer memory data into the specified devices of the programmable controller CPU or to store the programmable controller CPU device data into the QJ71MT91 buffer memory automatically Operating procedure Start I O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh Setting screen Auto refresh setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No Module model name QJZ1MTS1 Module side Module side Module side 1 PLC side S Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset Geon Device word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of 4096 4096 0 gt Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operation status 1 to 64 User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup Cancel Explanation of items 1 oe ea a Setting items Buffer memory Setting Item Reference section addr
253. nction Operating procedure Monitor Test screen Automatic communication Monitor Test Screen Automatic communication status Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value Automatic communication operation status Stopped Automatic communication parameter error code storage area Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area Automatic communication start request Not requested Being requested Automatic communication stop request Not requested Being requested Parameters 1 Automatic communication operation Normal status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Test Items Buffer memory Reference Monitor Test Item address section Automatic communication operation status up Section 5 2 1 0C11 Automatic communication parameter error code storage area PUN Section 11 3 1 oi DES Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area Automatic communication start request 1 This section Automatic communication stop request 1 tis section 0C20nH to 0C23H Automatic communication operation status storage area 3104 to 3107 Parameter 1 to 64 Section
254. ned by the MODBUS device assignment parameters and the default assignment parameter values set to the QJ71MT91 buffer memory Assignment of MODBUS devices by default assignment parameters 000001 008192 008193 016384 020481 022528 022529 030720 030721 038912 038913 040960 040961 043008 043009 045056 045057 053248 053249 055296 055297 057344 057345 059392 059393 061440 061441 063488 063489 065536 Input 100001 to 165536 x 8192 0 to 1FFF Input assignment 1 100001 108192 165536 Input register 300001 to 365536 Empty 300001 365536 Holding register 400001 to 465536 400001 D 12288 5 to 12287 Holding register assignment 1 412288 420481 y Holding register esit 422528 QJ71MT91 neon User free area 4098 5000 to 5FFF 4 Holding register assignment 3 426624 430721 w 8192 0 to 1FFF Holding register assignment 4 438912 Empty If SW 440961 2048 0to 7FF v Holding register assignment 5 443008 Empty sor INDE EM 453249 2048 0102047 Holding register assignment 6 455296 Empty Paws oN 457345 2048 0 to 2047 Ly Holding register assignment 7 459392 Ie ox GN 461441 2048 0 to 2047 y Holding register assignment 8 463488 Empty 465536 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Set values of default assignment parameters Default Assignment
255. nen nennen nnns 8 6 8 32 Operation OVerview a nam ne I t pe e de eee nadie Ege ee un ud eu e aa TY ge FER TURNS 8 9 8 3 3 Starting the Intelligent function module utility e 8 11 3 4 Initial Setting a 1e hee he tet Beso eWeek aah aaah as eue e Rene ea eeu ae Rene ann 8 13 8 5 Auto RefreshiSetting ait dt aet add ade e e Hee ade t da o RR DR end 8 15 9 6 Monton Fest citt EE pean EE D EE E E SD EE EE EE E PER EROR 8 17 8 6 1 X Y Monitor test 1 iiia iid dd de LR i ed eia eto LO iat t e t ed to a o LO eo ro co s ciae 8 21 8 6 2 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter status sesssssssssseeee 8 23 8 6 3 Automatic communication status sss 8 24 Rem dzogdo m DEM 8 26 8 6 5 Communication status nnne nr etre nnns 8 27 9 6 6 PING teSt imita ae ana ee Ra dee Sie 8 29 8 7 Parameter Setting Using GX Configurator MB ssssssseeeeeeeennen nennen enne 8 30 8 7 1 Basic parameters 5 achete de si e d eder ec din de Ld e D Re eL oe pe da DRE 8 30 8 7 2 Automatic communication parameters cc ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecneeseaeeseaeescaeeeseeeseaeeeeaeeesieeeieeess 8 33 8 7 3 MODBUS device assignment parameters sesssssssessesseeeeeneneee nee 8 35 9 1 Parameter Setting rcc iL e o e ee e ERU TR UE Fe v Eee Fe ERR Fe y e ve E d e de d ved 9 1 9 1 1 Basic parameter setting eee teet tette tree tend A pn dea tha dta dn n
256. next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial Reference Address Application Name Initial Value Write pe 1 Section 0E70 to 0E71 UDP packet reception count Oh 3696 to 3697 Count of UDP packet reception Section discarded due to sum check 0 X 113 1 3698 to 3699 error Tu Mein to Total number of sent UDP 0 H H 3700 to 3701 packets System area use prohibited 3702 to 3705 Communi OE7A to Communi cation 0E83 cation status by System area use prohibited 3706 to 3715 protocol type Framing error count 3716 to 3717 DESS to Section OE87 Overflow count Ou 113 3718 to 3719 Receive error em fe 3720 to 3721 OE8A to OE8F System area use prohibited 3722 to 3727 OE90 to OFDF System area use prohibited 3728 to 4063 OFEO 4064 Communication time check Communication time check check i Emm I 4065 OFE3 IP address On 4066 to 4067 en ax S m 38 18 ee Total packet transmission count A R Result OFE6 4070 oo is OFE7 4071 di di ud PETRA C EE to OFFF System area use prohibited 4072 to 4095 Automatic communication function buffer Section f 0 x input area 5 2 1 System area use prohibited Automatic 3000 to communication function 3FFF buffer Automatic communication function buffer 0 R W x Section 12288 to output area 5 2 1 16383 4000 to 4FFF ibi 16384 to System area use prohibited 20479 5000 to 2045
257. nment parameters when using the MODBUS device assignment function with the QJ71MT91 acting as a slave When using the initial values preset to the QJ71MT91 no setting is required for these parameters Refer to Section 7 4 for details 2 Parameter setting method Set the parameters to the QJ71MT91 by any of the following methods a Setting from utility package Set the parameters from the GX Configurator MB utility package Refer to Chapter 8 for details b Setting from sequence program Set the parameters from the sequence program Refer to Chapter 9 for details c Setting with GX Works2 Add the QJ71MT91 to the data of the intelligent function module in GX Works2 for the settings For how to operate the data of an intelligent function module refer to the GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Intelligent Function Module 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 3 Parameter setting procedures Set the parameters in the following procedures Parameter setting procedures Are the parameters set using GX Configurator MB NO Set the basic parameter starting method b0 of the communication condition setting Switch 2 to ON Refer to Section 6 6 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method b1 of the communication condition setting Switch 2 to ON Refer to Section 6 6 Set the basic parameters Refer to Section 8 7 1 9 2 9 3 Set the automatic comm
258. nored Refer to 3 in POINT on the next page 1 Setthe value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 2 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The programmable controller CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 3 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal T kA Write setting o EA 10 4 10 4 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Set O for the case of write only 5 Set 0 for the case of read only 6 The combinations of the read and write targets that can be set in the target MODBUS device type setting and the setting ranges of the access points are as indicated in the following table Type Specification of the Target MODBUS Device Access Points Access Points Setting Range Range Set Function Code dues Read target Write target Read points Write point valu 01 Readcois 11200 02 Read discrete inputs 110200 No specification 04 Readinputregisters 110125 03 Readholding registers 1to125 20 Readfile record itoa Co 15 Write muttiplecoiis tt 1968 No specification Holdimgregister 16 Write muttipleregisters _ 110128 21 Wr
259. not support this function However it can be issued from the master QJ71MT91 by use of the MBREQ instruction 2 The function codes 07 08 11 12 and 17 are the functions dedicated to the MODBUS serial protocol 3 For details of the function codes for the master function refer to the explanation of the corresponding function 4 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the QJ71MT91 mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 5 This function has a limit in the slave function when the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station An exception response will result if a device unsupported by the MELSECNET H remote I O station is assigned as a MODBUS device and an access request is made from the master station In this case an error code will be stored into the error log of the QJ71MT91 and an exception code will be returned to the master 6 This function is not supported when the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 Frame Specifications The frame specifications of MODBUS TCP are indicated below Ethernet frame IP header TCP heade Application data header Error check MODBUS TCP ADU MODBUS TCP application data unit MBAP header PDU MODBUS application header Protocol data unit Transaction protocol ID Message Module ID Function code Data length P Message length gt l
260. ntroller CPU Check for a watch dog timer error X1F Check the intelligent function module switch 1 operation mode setting value Check the intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting value Check the intelligent function module switch 3 4 IP address setting value Check if the QJ71MT91 is not mounted with the A mode QCPU Check if the module is in the hardware or self loopback test mode Refer to RUN LED turned off Check if the basic parameter setting error completed X2 is on Check if the automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 is on If the programmable controller CPU is faulty take corrective action according to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Reset the programmable controller CPU or power the programmable controller off and then on If the problem still persists after resetting it again the possible cause is a hardware fault Perform a hardware test and replace the QJ71MT91 Section 6 6 Mount the QJ71MT91 with the Q mode Section 2 1 QCPU Restart the test after checking the mounting status of the QJ71MT91 If the ERR LED turns on again the possible cause is a hardware fault Change the QJ71MT91 Check the setting range of each intelligent function module switch and correct the value Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 This section 2 5 Refer to Basic parameter setting error completed X
261. nts Write device data Write device data code register number n register number m 1 m 17H 2AF7H 00641 01F 3x 0020H W0000 value WOO1F value Tk Number of bytes m x2 gt Response message format Slave Master QJ71MT91 Function code Function code Number of bytes Read device data ET Read device data 17H nx2 1 n C8H 411000 value 411099 value L H L EE Number T nx2 10 10 10 10 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 Z P MBREQ With this instruction a request message can be sent to the slave in any given PDU protocol data unit format Usable Devices Internal device Link direct device Intelligent Constant Set Data System user JL function module Index register File register Others Word Bit Word edu K H or U AG i 85 EO o o ooo m Instruction symbol Execution condition Command ZMBREQ Un S1 S2 D1 D2 Command 1 1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later or Universal model QCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Z MBREQ Ji ZP MBREQ Set data Set data Setting Setting Side Data Type Un Head I O number of module n ser 00H to FE upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation Head number of device where control data are stored BI
262. o 2400 When the set value is 0 the QJ71MT91 operates at 60 30s Response monitoring timer value Set time set value x 500ms Not specified Automatic Read coils communication Read discrete inputs parameter 1 Type specification of the target Read input registers MODBUS device Read holding registers Write coils Write multiple registers Read Write multiple registers Head buffer memory address 1000H to 1FFFH 0000H Target MODBUS device head 0 to 65535 number Access points 2 0 to 2000 mm Head buffer memory address 3000H to 3FFFH 0000H Target MODBUS device head 0 to 65535 1 number Access points 2 0 to 1968 Ew 020CH to Automatic O4FFH communication Same as in automatic communication parameter 1 524 to 1279 parameter 2 to 64 Read setting Write setting 1 When specifying a value of 32768 80004 or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 2 The setting range and default value of the access points change depending on the target MODBUS device type Refer to 8 in this section 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 1 Target station IP address 2 3 4 a Set the IP address of the target slave device b When the target slave device is on another Ethernet and an access is to be made via a router set the router relay function of the basic parameter to 1 Used and set the routing information of the basic parameter Refer to Section 7 2 for t
263. o send the request message to write the value OR masked with 0008 to the holding register 400003 Mask write register FC 22 of the slave IP address 192 1 0 2 When the I O signals of the QJ71MT91 are X Y00 to X Y1F 10 16 10 16 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 1 Operation of program example MODBUS TCP QJ71MT91 slave device Master 192 1 0 2 4t Ethernet lt OR mask value gt Mask write lt Holding register 400003 gt b15 b5 b3 bO OR b15 b5 b3 bO olololololo olololo olo 1 olol gt 1 2 Frames sent and received by MBREQ instruction a Request message format Master QJ71MT91 Slave Function code Function code Target holding register number AND mask value OR mask value 00081 16H 00H 02H 00H 00H 00H Sending order b Response message format lt When completed normally gt Function code Function code Target holding register number AND mask value OR mask value 0008u 16H 00H 02H 00H 00H 00H Receiving order 7 bytes lt When completed with an error gt Function code Function code Exception code 96H ere 2 bytes Refer to Section 11 3 2 for details of the exception code 10 17 10 17 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q X21 xo X 4 Itt 1 I ov m Do Execu
264. odule information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MTS1 Setting item Current value Setting value Communication time check Transmission count IP address poen PING test execution request Being requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Select input Make text file Setting range Not requested Being requested Stop monitor 11 46 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 Check the status during PING test execution PING test execution request current value Being requested PING test completed current value OFF PING test Module information MODBUS R Module Module type Module model name QJ71MT31 Start 1 0 No 0000 MELSEC Q Setting item Communication time check Transmission count IP address Current value Setting value 2 1 0 2 PING test execution request Being requested eing requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count OFF Failure count Flash ROM setting Ain mne Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Select input Monitoring Setling range Not requested Being requested 6 Check the status wh
265. of other manufactures The master function supports the following two functions a Automatic communication function By setting the automatic communication parameters MODBUS device data can be automatically read from or written to the slaves at the specified intervals using the QJ71MT91 buffer memory 1 Data can be transferred between the QJ71MT91 buffer memory and programmable controller CPU device memory by making the auto refresh setting with the utility package GX Configurator MB or accessing a intelligent function module device with a sequence program Ethernet p MODBUSS TCP slave device Eg Third party remote I O etc Holding register ooo000 Programmable M CPU QJ71MT91 Master function N MODBUS TCP slave device x Third party sensor etc Device memory Buffer memory 100ms read Holding register 250ms read Auto refresh 1000ms read 100ms write a MODBUS TOP slave device M Third party programmable 0 oa controller Holding register MODBUS device read write request messages are issued to the slave repeatedly at specified intervals K 1 The MODBUS device indicates the device area of the slave where data can be read written in response to a request from the master 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q b Communication using dedicated instruction Dedicated instructions can b
266. ompleted Result Execution result 192 1 0 2 Lene Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details IP Address input Monitoring Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Execute test 11 45 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Confirm the conditions set in 2 When the processing is completed a Completed message appears and the data set in 2 are displayed in the Current value field Redo the settings if changing the conditions PING test Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value 2 Communication time check Transmission count 192 1 0 2 PING test execution request Being requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display IP Address input Make text file Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Stop monitor 4 Conduct a PING test Select Being requested in the PING test execution request setting value field and click the button When the processing is completed a Completed message appears and the PING test is executed PING test M
267. on completed 10 9 X20 Xo X3 A wv Hm Dedicated Module Basic instruction READY parameter start setting command existence MOV HO LM MWoN HO pvr H060010002 HOV K255 mov HO mov HO MOV H505 MOV KO pa iv K10999 HOV K100 MOV KO ps iv KO MOV K499 MOV K32 MOV K32 z MBRW UO DO 100 WO MO Mi A Processing program for normal completion i MBRW MBRW instruction instruction completed result BE C O 0 00 ee SSS SSS Ss So edi Processing program for error completion MBRW instruction result pa END MELSEC Q Execution type Clears the complete condition to 0 Clears the MODBUS exception code to 0 Target IP address Module ID Station No Target slave port No Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device Corresponding file number Target MODBUS device head number Access points Clears read data storage size to 0 Corresponding file number Target MODBUS device head number Access points Write data storage size Dedicated instruction Z MBRW 10 9 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q REMARK The MODBUS TCP frames used in communication with the slave in this sample program are as shown below Request message format Master QJ71MT91 Slave Function Data Function Read head holding Read points Write head holding Write poi
268. onatu bat eit onda occid olsen 7 17 7 3 Automatic Communication Parameters essen ennemis 7 19 7 3 1 Automatic communication parameters details sssssssssssssssseeeeeeeeneennne 7 19 7 4 MODBUS Device Assignment Parameters cccecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeeeeeesareseeseeeas 7 23 7 4 1 MODBLUS device SizeS tise is Goes atiis ie Ra ecd ficit oca Uude edited en inna 7 25 7 4 2 MODBUS device assignment parameters details sssssseeeeeeeneene 7 26 7 4 3 Default assignment parameters sse nnne nnns 7 29 7 4 4 MODBUS extended file register assignment iecit dnte tite ted tend 7 31 7 4 5 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment sse ennemi 7 32 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 1 to 8 36 8 1 Functions of the Utility Package 0 ee eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeatenas 8 1 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling the Utility Package seeeenennnnnnn nennen 8 2 9 2 1 Handling precautions 2 doge e dtt n e P dn E d nde 8 2 8 2 2 Operating environmient cete diente tte tte the tte Rae da o pre ee te Rao dio ne poe Ra o Rae qnare n sonde 8 4 8 3 Utility Package Operation oaia a a Ee E senes einen teeth then E the dta dba death dna 8 6 8 3 1 Common utility package operations sessssseeeeeenenenenenen nen
269. onfirmed using GX Configurator MB Refer to Section 8 6 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 2 Will the initial values of the basic parameters be changed NO Turn OFF bO the basic parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Turn ON bO the basic parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Create a sequence program for basic parameter setting Refer to Chapter 9 Will the automatic communication function be used NO Create a sequence program for automatic communication parameter setting Refer to Chapter 9 of the MODBUSS device assignment parameters Turn OFF b1 MODBUSS device assignment parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Turn ON b1 MODBUSS device assignment parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Create a sequence program for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Refer to Chapter 9 3 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 3 Write the sequence programs to the programmable controller CPU Reset and restart the programmable controller CPU Is ERR LED OFF NO i Intelligent function module switch setting error Check the err
270. onnecting peripheral devices to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer to the intelligent function module configure an interlocking circuit in a sequence program so that the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also before performing other control operations program modifications and operation status modifications status control on the running programmable controller be sure to read the manual carefully and thoroughly confirm the safety Especially in the above mentioned control operations that are performed from an external device to a remote programmable controller any problems on the programmable controller side may not be dealt with promptly due to a data communication error In addition to configuring an interlocking circuit in a sequence program determine how the system handles data communication errors etc between the devices and the programmable controller CPU e Do not write any data in the system area Use prohibited of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Also do not output turn on the use prohibited signal which is one of the output signals from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module If data is written to the system area Use prohibited or the use prohibited signal is output there is a risk that the programmable controller system may malfunction CAUTION e Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit an
271. onnection transmission failure TCP connections exceeding the number preset in the preferred node specification was attempted to be established Preferred connection count over error As the TCP connection was cut off from the target device the response message via GX Developer connection could not be returned Response message transmission failure The send receive processing was forcibly interrupted by the basic parameter setting processing An error occurred in the TCP connection and the send receive processing was forcibly interrupted Send receive processing interruption As the TCP connection was being closed the send receive processing was interrupted The send receive processing was forcibly interrupted by the basic parameter setting processing Send receive processing interruption 73D6u 11 34 COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR MELSEC Q Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not O Check the line status for an error Increase the maximum number of TCP connections with the target node in the preferred node specification Decrease the number of connections simultaneously used with the target node Check w
272. or code 7360n or Response monitoring timer time out error error code 7378H etc 3 Automatic communication operation status a Confirming automatic communication operation status Use Automatic communication operation status X6 to confirm the automatic communication operation status b When an error occurs in the automatic communication Automatic communication error status X7 turns ON Also any erroneous part of the parameters and error details can be identified by the following 1 Acquisition of automatic communication parameter number 2 during error occurrence Acquisition of the automatic communication parameter number for the error Check the operation status storage area OC20H to 0C23h in the buffer memory to identify the error Refer to Section 11 3 1 Error code confirmation In the automatic communication error code storage area 0C28H to 0C67H of the buffer memory check the error code stored in the area corresponding to the automatic communication parameter number identified in the above 1 Refer to Section 11 3 1 7 Refer to Section 11 3 3 for the error code 1 On the Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB the operation status and error code for each automatic communication parameter can be confirmed Refer to Section 8 6 3 2 The QJ71MT91 guarantees the data between the programmable controller devices and the network line in units of one word 16 bits 5 FUNCTIONS
273. or code in the system monitor of GX Developer and take action Refer to Section 11 3 3 Is X2 Basic parameter setting error completed ON 3 lt Basic parameter error gt Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 YES 3 Is X5 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed ON YES lt Automatic communication parameter error gt Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Is X9 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed ON YES lt MODBUS device assignment parameter error gt Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 3 Parameter setting complete 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 2 Basic Parameters 7 2 1 Basic parameters details The basic parameters are classified into the following three types 1 TCP UDP IP setting Address 0000u 0 Parameter Name TCP ULP timer value Set time set value X 500ms Setting Range 2 to 2400 MELSEC Q Initial Value 60 0001H 1 TCP zero window timer value Set time set value X 500ms 2 to 2400 20 0002H TCP UDP IP 2 TCP resend timer value Set time set value x 500ms 2 to 2400 20 monitoring 0003H 3 timer TCP end timer value Set time set value x 500ms 2 to 2400 40 00041 4 IP reasse
274. or the communication targets connected for data communication Target device personal computer other QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module MODBUS protocol compatible device etc Personal computer The IBM PC AT or compatible DOS V based personal computer Ethernet Address Slave Master function Slave function Request message Generic Term Abbreviation Description A generic term for Microsoft Windows 7 Starter operating system Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium operating system Microsoft Windows 7 Professional operating system Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate operating system and Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise operating system Note that the 32 bit version is specified as 32 bit Windows 7 and the 64 bit version Windows 7 is specified as 64 bit Windows 7 A generic term for Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Business operating system Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate operating system and Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise operating system A generic term for Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system and Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system Windows Vista Windows XP MEANINGS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERMS The following explains the meanings and definitions of the terms used in this manual Meaning Definition
275. orientation is left right reversal App 1 App 1 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Function Upgrade of the QJ71MT91 The QJ71MT91 version has been upgraded with a new function added The new function and the supported version are shown below Supported version APP Redundant system function Function version D or later Appendix 3 Processing Time This section explains the processing time of the QJ71MT91 by function The processing time of the QJ71MT91 may become longer than that calculated in this section depending on the network load factor line congestion number of TCP connections used simultaneously and GX Developer connection existence Refer to the processing time calculated by the expression in this section when having the QJ71MT91 communicate with one target device using an already established TCP connection 1 Master function performance a Automatic communication function performance 1 Automatic communication function communication time Unit ms The automatic communication function communication time is the time from when the repeat interval timer expires until the repeat interval timer is started again after completion of communication with the slave Tac 7 Ts 2 Calculation items Setting Item Tac Automatic communication function communication time Ts Target slave device processing time App 2 App 2 APPENDICES Automatic communication function communication time
276. ormation Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 Setting item Setting value Automatic communication parameter 1 Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Units 10ms Response monitoring timer value Units 500ms Type specification of the target MODBUS R device No select Read setting Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS R device head number Details IP Address input Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Make text file End setup 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q Setting items For the automatic communication parameter setting set the data format or setting range value of each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save the set values i Buffer memory Reference Setting Item address section 0200u to 0201u Target station IP address 512 to 513 0202H 514 0203H 515 0204H 516 0205H 517 Automatic an 0206H communication Head buffer memory address 518 setting Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specication ofthe target MODBUS device specification of the target MODBUS Type specication ofthe target MODBUS dee device parameter 1 0207H MN MODBUS device head number 519 Section 7 3 0208H 520 0209H Head buffer memory address 521 Write setting Access ZEE 020AH 522
277. otal number of ICMP echo request received Total number of IEMP echo reply sent Flash ROM setting Details Current value display Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Items OE10u to OE11u IP packet reception count 3600 to 3601 OE12u to OE 13H 3602 to 3603 OE14u to 0E15H Total number of sent IP packets 3604 to 3605 Count of IP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Section 11 3 1 OE2Adn to OE2Bn Simultaneous transmission error detection count 3626 to 3627 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q Buffer memory Reference Monitor Item address section ICMP OES30u to O0E31H 3632 to 3633 Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check 0E32n to 0E33H ICMP packet reception count error 3634 to 3635 OE34u to OE35u Total number of sent ICMP packets 3636 to 3637 OE36H to 0E37H Total number of ICMP echo request received 3638 to 3639 OE38u to OE39u Total number of ICMP echo reply sent 3640 to 3641 OE3Au to OE3BH Total number of ICMP echo request sent 3642 to 3643 l OE3Cu to OE3DH Total number of ICMP echo reply received 3644 to 3645 OE50n to 0E51H 3664 to 3665 Section 11 3 1 0E524 to OE53u 3666 to 3667 OE54n to OE55n 3668 to 3669 OE70nu to OE71n 3696 to 3697 OE72u to OE73n 3698 to 3699 0E74 to OE75n 3700 to 3701 OE84n to O
278. our local Mitsubishi representative If the problem cannot be resolved in the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Review the settings of the PING test MELSEC Q Occurrence 1 2 3 Continued on next page 11 32 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Eror Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Occurrence ipti i iv i code i 2 An error was detected in the 73C0H RAM error ERR RAM test An error was detected in the 73C1H ROM error ERR ROM test 73C2H 73C8H 11 33 Self loopback test error Offline mode error An error was detected in the self loopback test In the offline mode parameters were set by GX Configurator MB In the offline mode Basic parameter setting request Y1 was turned on In the offline mode Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 was turned on In the offline mode Automatic communication stop request Y6 was turned on In the offline mode MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 was turned on In the offline mode PING test execution request Y1C was turned on COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Counter the problem in the following procedure Check whether or not the QJ71MT91 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit Check whether or not the operating
279. own below Example 5000H Enter a value H5000 Head device number device number Assignment points 9 PROGRAMMING 9 PROGRAMMING 9 1 Parameter Setting 9 1 1 Basic parameter setting MELSEC Q This chapter explains how to set parameters with sequence programs When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems On screen parameter setting for the QJ71MT91 is available by use of the utility package GX Configurator MB reducing sequence programs Refer to Chapter 8 for details of the utility package GX Configurator MB operation method 1 Basic parameter setting method Make basic parameter setting in the following procedure 1 Store the parameters into the basic parameter area address 0000u to 01D4n of the buffer memory 2 Turn on Basic parameter setting request Y1 I O signals used for basic parameter setting Use the following I O signals for basic parameter setting Signal Name Module READY ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting normally completed ON Normally completed OFF Basic parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Basic parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set Basic parameter setting request ON Being requested OFF Not requested 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Timing charts for basi
280. page 11 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code 11 27 Buffer memory address range error IP address setting error MODBUS device number setting range error MODBUS device points setting error Module ID setting error Execution type setting error Response monitoring timer setting error Write data storage size setting error The setting range of the buffer memory in the automatic communication parameter is outside the range of the automatic communication function buffer input output area The setting of the target IP address set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect The MODBUS device range of the read write target set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is greater than the maximum value 65536 The MODBUS device range of the read write target set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is outside the setting range The setting of the module ID set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect The setting of the execution type set in the dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect The setting of the response monitoring timer in the dedicated instruction s control data is outside the setting range The setting of the response monitoring timer in the dedicated instruction s control dat
281. quest message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 86H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 7 Write multiple coils FC 15 Writes values ON OFF to multiple coils Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 1968 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head coil number Write points Number Device data ue Device data OF 00004 to FFFFx 00014 to 07BOx of bytes n n 0001H to 00F61 CT Number of bytes n LUN Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 Device data 1 Data storage order Device data n The values ON OFF stored into the device data 1 to n are written to the coils in order from low order to high order bits of the device data x The number of points specified as the write points must be matched with the number of bits specified as the number of bytes For example when the write points are 16 set the number of bytes to 2 bytes 16 bits 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Head coil number Write points OF x The value same as in the head The value same as in the coil number in
282. r setting command KO KO 7P RENTO H K1 K1 HO K2304 02304 K255 M201 REMTO instruction completion M201 M202 SET Y1008 J REMTO REMTO instruction instruction completion result W202 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference l REMTO Manual Remote I O Network l instruction a a a a aa a a a a 4 result Initializes MODBUSS device assignment parameter setting area Device code Head device number Head coil number Assignment points Device code Head device number Head input register number Assignment points Device code Head device number Head holding register number Assignment points Turns OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting command M200 Transfers MODBUS device assignment parameters to QJ71MT91 buffer memory Turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y1008 when ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error MELSEC Q 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q X1008 RST y1008 J Turns OFF MODBUS device MODBUS assignment parameter setting parameter request Y1008 when setting is EN completed normally completed 0 ird esr vioog Tums OFF MODBUS device MODBUS assignment parameter setting device request Y 1008 and stores error parameter setting code and parameter setting result completed into D3091 when settin
283. r code storage area Basic parameter setting area Data register MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS device assignment Error device type parameter setting result storage area D4008 to D4071 Automatic communication error code storage area parameter 1 to 64 Automatic communication operation status storage D4092 to D4095 area parameter 1 to 64 For auto refresh 7 EYE 7 7 D4096 to D4159 Automatic communication function buffer input area D5000 to D5099 Automatic communication function buffer output area D9100 Automatic Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error D9101 code Automatic communication parameter 2 Continued on next page 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Application SB20 Module status Link special relay SB47 Baton pass status host SB49 Host data link status SW70 1 Baton pass status of each station Link special register SW74 1 Cyclic transmission status of each station SW78 1 Parameter communication status of each station For interlock between local and other stations oom For MC instruction REMTO instruction For instruction completion REMTO instruction For instruction result Basic parameter setting command REMFR instruction For instruction completion For basic parameter REMFR instruction For instruction result REMFR instruction For instruction completion REMFR instruction For instruction result M1 M20 M30 M31 M40 M50 M51 M60 REMFR ins
284. r to Section 6 6 1 for details of the communication starting conditions of this Switch setting and each function 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q b MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Bit 1 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters for the time when the power is turned OFF and then ON When corresponding bit is OFF The QJ71MT91 starts up with its default MODBUS device assignment parameters When corresponding bit is ON The QJ71MT91 starts up with the MODBUS device assignment parameters set using a Sequence program or GX Configurator MB However the user set MODBUS device assignment parameters are not registered to the QJ71MT91 until the following operation is performed When a sequence program was used to set the MODBUS device assignment parameters Turn ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 When GX Configurator MB was used to set the MODBUS device assignment parameters After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the programmable controller CPU the initial setting is updated when the programmable controller is powered ON from OFF or the programmable controller CPU is reset with the programmable controller CPU s RUN STOP switch set to RUN 1 Make this setting ON when a sequence program or GX Configurator MB is used to set the MODBUS device assignment parameters 2 If no MODBUS device assignment parameters have be
285. rameter file Close parameters Closes the parameter file If any data are modified a dialog asking for file saving will appear Save parameters Saves the parameter file Delete parameters Deletes the parameter file Exit Closes this screen b Online menu Monitor Test Read from PLC Activates the Select monitor test module screen Reads intelligent function module parameters from the CPU module Writes intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module Write to PLC 1 Saving intelligent function module parameters in a file Since intelligent function module parameters cannot be saved in a file by the project saving operation of GX Developer save them on the shown module selection screen Reading writing intelligent function module parameters from to a programmable controller using GX Developer a Intelligent function module parameters can be read from and written into a programmable controller after having been saved in a file b Seta target programmable controller CPU in GX Developer Online Transfer Setup Only use the control CPU for the QJ71MT91 to write the intelligent function module parameters for a multiple CPU system to the programmable controller c When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Read from PLC and Write to PLC must be performed from GX Developer Checking the required utility While the start I O is displayed on the Intelligent
286. ransmission message on the master side so that The MODBUS device communication is started after MODBUS device assignment parameter setting the MODBUS device PEE A assignment parameter setting specification error is in process existence XA turns ON The range of the MODBUS device specified Set the MODBUS device in the received request assignment parameter so that 7384H message is outside the COM ERR the MODBUS device specified MODBUS device in the received request assignment parameter setting message is within the range range Continued on next page The request message of the Confirm the function code Function code function code not supported supported by the QJ71MT91 38n error by the QJ71MT91 slave BOERS slave function and review the function was received request message to be sent 11 30 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q E Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action ipti i iv i Code TE The range of the MODBUS device specified in the received request message exceeds the maximum value Review the specified data of the of the MODBUS device MODBUS device on the The maximum value of the COM ERR master side from which the extended file register is request message was sent MODBUS device 10000 and that of any specification error other MODBUS device is 65536 The access points of the MODBUS device specified Review the specified data of the in the received
287. rating environment sssss 8 4 Operation mode setting 6 11 Parameter setting method 7 1 Parameter setting procedures 7 2 Parameter types 7 1 Part names 6 4 PDU formats ene tiec 4 4 Performance specifications 3 2 PING test sssssssssssess 8 29 11 44 Preferred node specification 7 18 Preferred node specification IP address 7 18 Preferred node specification TCP connection sess 7 18 Pre operational procedures and setting 6 2 Processing time sssssssssse App 2 Program example Program example for use in normal Q R System configuration ssss 9 11 Program example for use in MELSECNET H remote I O network sssssssss 9 29 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment 7 32 QJ71MT91 status confirmation 11 12 Relationship between COM ERR LED and O sighals 5 e et mee 11 43 Relationship between PING test and I O Signals s tete rhet erret 11 49 Repeat interval timer value 7 20 Index 3 Request message format 4 4 Request message processing time App 5 Response message format 4 4 Response monitoring timer value
288. register depend on the file register ZR assignment size of the programmable controller CPU For details refer to the QCPU user s manual explanation program fundamentals 3 Refer to Section 7 4 4 for the extended file register assignment 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 2 MODBUS device assignment parameters details Default Address Parameter Name Setting Range tags Value 2304 ee ee e e E E m m 0941H 2369 0942H 2370 0943H 2371 0944n to 097FH 2372 to 2431 2432 2433 2434 2435 2436 to 2495 2496 2497 2498 2499 2500 to 2559 Coil assignment 1 Head coil number 0000H to FFFFH D m points 0000H to FFFFH P assignment 2t Same as in coil assignment Same asin coil assignment 1 00000 Device code 0000 Device code not assigned Other than 0000H Device code Head device number 0000H to FFFFH Input assignment 1 1 Head input number 0000H to FFFFH a points 0000H to FFFFH Input assi t2 Ms ee Same as in input assignment Same asin input assignment 0000 D vicecode 0000 Device code not assigned Other than 0000H Device code Head device number OOOOH to FFFFH il assi 1 Coil Head device number OOOOH to FFFFH Input register assignment 1 Head input t Input register E ead inputregister 0000H to FFFFH number Holding register Device code 0000 Device code not assigned Other than 0000H Device code 1 oC NR RE points 0000H to FFFFH
289. ror code is cleared when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed X8 turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area a When a MODBUS device assignment parameter error occurs with the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 ON the device type and assigned group No of the error device is stored in this area b The device type and assigned group No are stored when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 turns ON c The device type and assigned group No are cleared when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normally completed X8 turns ON d The following values are stored to show the erroneous device type when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 is ON Error devices and corresponding values Coil 0001H Input 0002u e Input register 0004n e Holding register 00051 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 6 Automatic communication operation status storage area a The operation statuses of the automatic communication function are stored in bit format in correspondence with the automatic communication parameters 1 to 64 0 Operating normally OFF The case where the automatic communication parameters are not set is also included 1 Error occurred ON b The operation statuses are stored into the bit positions from low order to high order bits
290. router IP address Set the IP address of the router default router to be used when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the router specified in the router information refer to e below Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The subnet address of the default router is the same as that of the local station QJ71MT91 Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 The default router is used for communication if the corresponding subnet address does not exist in the router information refer to e below at data transmission d Number of routers set 1 Set the number of routers within the allowable range according to e Subnet address and f Router IP address below when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the default router 2 Setthe necessary number of subnet addresses and router IP addresses to the areas of e and f below e Router information Subnet address 1 Setthe network address 1 or subnet address 2 of the target device when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 All the host address bits are 0 2 Setthe router information i
291. rred node specification 1 IP address Preferred node specification 1 Number of connections Turns ON Basic parameter setting request Y1 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Xl ii RST YI Turns OFF Basic parameter E LN setting request Y1 when petting setting is completed normally normally completed SET MI j Turns ON automatic Parameter communication parameter seting a setting command X2 4 RST vi Turns OFF Basic parameter E EE setting request Y1 and stores Celine error code into D100 when purs ich setting fails complete UO MOVP 63088 D9001 1 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q lt lt Automatic communication parameter setting gt gt MI X0 X3 X6 uoy IA fp pf E y MOVE HO 6512 H300 J Initializes automatic Parameter Module Basic Automatic communication parameter setting setting READY parameter comm command setting operation area existence status Automatic communication 707 ui ol 4 L parameter 1 Read coils gt pwovP H0C0010002 6512 Target station IP address i uo s K255 6514 Module ID i i UO i i o K1200 6515 Repeat interval timer value i i UON p i i MOVP K amp 0 6516 Response monitoring timer value i W s L a 8517 Type specification of the target ioi MODBUS device i MOVP H1100 6518 Head buffer memory address i i UO i Read setting MVP K15000 6519
292. rrent value display Monitoring Select input Make text file Setting range Not requested Being requested Stop monitor Execute test 5 Confirm the COM ERR LED OFF request current value The COM ERR LED OFF request current value must be as shown below COM ERR LED OFF request current value Not requested Monitor Test Module information Module type X MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name GJ71MTS1 Setting item Current value Setting value LED ON status INIT status OPEN status ERR status Not requested Basic MODBUS R devi i t et p ril eye essioranent parentes Basic MODBUS R device Automatic communication status Automatic communication Error log Error log Flash ROM setting Details Current value display Monitoring Select input Make text file Setting range Not requested Being requested Stop monitor 11 42 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 2 Program example for use of sequence program This section explains how to turn off the COM ERR LED from a sequence program 1 Relationship between COM ERR LED and I O signals Upon occurrence of a communication error the COM ERR LED COM ERR LED status X1B ON on the front of the QJ71MT91 turns ON 1 in the figure a Turn ON the COM ERR LED OFF request Y1B to turn OFF
293. rror t MODBUS device assignment parameter 11 3 1 3091 information error code storage area 3092 assignment a 0C15 parameter setting Error assigned group 3093 result storage area No 0C16 to OC1F System area use prohibited 3094 to 3103 Med to Automatic communication operation status Section 3404 i 3107 storage area parameters 1 to 64 11 3 1 0C24 to C 0C27 a System area use prohibited 3108 to 3111 OC28 t0 Operating 2S l 0C67 ene Ing monitor Automatic communication error code storage Section 3112 to 3175 area area parameters 1 to 64 11 3 1 0C68 to OCAT7 NECI 3176 to 3239 OCFD System area use prohibited 3240 to 3325 OCFE 3326 Number of errors occurred OCFF 3327 Error log write pointer 0D00 3328 Detailed error code a daos Exception code wf OR 0D02 Section H 0 ETT ae A A 0D03 3331 Error log Error log 1 Local station port No a 0D04 to 0D05 Target IP address 3332 to 3333 0D06 3334 Target device port No H OD07 System area use 3335 prohibited OD08 to ODFF Error log 2 to 32 Same as error log 1 x Pree 3336 to 3583 3 Continued on next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial Reference Address Application Name Initial Value Write Setting Section CK 1 2 OEO00 to OE02 FEE ebb Local station Ethernet address Ethemet 3584 to 3586 information address address 0E03
294. s replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows NT Windows XP Windows Server Visio Excel PowerPoint Visual Basic Visual C and Access are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States Japan and other countries Intel Pentium and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corp MODBUS is the registered trademark of SCHNEIDER AUTOMATION INC All other company names and product names used in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SPREAD Copyright c 1996 FarPoint Technologies Inc SH NA 080446ENG H SH 080446ENG H 1410 MEE MODEL QJ71MT91 U SY E MODEL CODE 13JR71 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
295. s of the request message to be sent Review the data part of the request message Review the data part of the request message Not issued by the slave function of the QJ71MT91 If the QJ71MT91 issued this code the number of simultaneously acceptable request message 64 is exceeded Retry after a little while 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Exception Corrective Action path Error Name Description Code Target device Master side QJ71MT91 Slave side In the slave a parity error was detected at access to the extended file register The gateway device MODBUS TCP gt MODBUS serial protocol is not available for use No response is given from the slave device connected ahead of the gateway device Memory parity error Not issued by the slave function of the QJ71MT91 Gateway unusable Gateway response failure 3 Error code for error completion of processing in slave QJ71MT91 If the processing in the slave QJ71MT91 results in error completion an exception code is stored into the buffer memory In the QJ71MT91 an error code is also stored into the buffer memory to identify the cause in detail The error code can be confirmed in the error log area address CFEH to DFFH of the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 1 8 for details of the error log area Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error codes 11 22 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 3 Error
296. screen Basic MODBUS R device Monitor Screen Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter status Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name 0J71MT91 Setting item Current value Setting value Basic parameter setting existence Parameters set Basic parameter error code storage area M DBUS R device assignment parameter Parameters set setting existence MODBUS R device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting result storage area Error device type Error assigned group No Flash ROM setting Details Current value Monitoring display Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Items Buffer memory Reference Monitor Item address section Basic parameter setting existence ro 0C10u Basic parameter error code storage area en MODBUS device IMODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence parameter setting existence 3 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area MA Section 11 3 1 0C14u MODBUS device assignment parameter 3092 Error device type setting result storage area 0C15H Error assigned group No 3093 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 8 6 3 Automatic communication status Monitor Test Purpose Monitor the communication status of the automatic communication fu
297. select Module type and Module model name Initial setting screen Initial setting Module information Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 Setting item Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Basic parameter Basic parameter Automatic communication parameter Automatic communication parameter MODBUSIR device assignment parameter MODBUS R device assignment Details Make text file End setup Refer to Section 8 4 Auto refresh Auto refresh setting screen Auto refresh setting Module information Module type MODBLIS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT91 P Module side Module side Module side 1 PLC side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset UR Device word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of 4096 4096 og gt Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operation status 1 to 64 User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup Refer to Section 8 5 MELSEC Q 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB 8 10 Online Monitor Test Select monitor test module screen Select monitor test module Select monitor test module Start 1 0 No Module type omo Module model
298. sing time at destination slave device App 4 App 4 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Slave function performance 1 Request message processing time Unit ms The request message processing time is the time from when the QJ71MT91 receives a request message from the master until it sends a response message after completion of processing Ts 5 7 X ni St x n2 2 Calculation items Setting Item Description Unit Tsl Request message processing time ms Local station scan time ms Any of the following values is applied depending on the function code and assignment status When programmable Function code controller CPU device is assigned When buffer memory is assigned controller CPU device When buffer memory Function code is assigned is assigned Normal Worst case case Any of the following values is applied depending on the function code and assignment status When programmable n2 App 5 App 5 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 4 GX Developer Connection Setup Example This section explains the setting of the GX Developer connection setup window when access is made from GX Developer to the programmable controller CPU via the QJ71MT91 For details of GX Developer refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 1 Access route GX Developer J IP address 128 0 0 1 MODBUS TCP PEEREEEE EERE EEE EEE Ethernet Head I O address 0000n IP address 128 0 0 2
299. status orvs o oo ooo status 0C05u Module status LED ON status Section 11 2 EUN status 3077 COM ERR status ERR status COM ERR LED OFF request 01 Section 11 4 1 XIY Monitortest 2 Section 8 6 1 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter status 2 Section 8 6 2 Automatic communication status 2 Section 8 6 3_ Emrlg 2 Section 8 6 4 Communication status 2 Section 8 6 5 PING test o T Seinge 1 For the COM ERR OFF request select the corresponding request in the Setting value column Refer to Section 11 4 1 for details 2 To move to each sub screen click the button in the Setting value column 3 The switch 5 cannot be checked in Monitor Test screen Specifications common to Monitor and Test screens including sub screens The following explains the specifications common to respective screens 1 Display data Setting item Displays I O signals and buffer memory names Current value Monitors the I O signal states and present buffer memory values Setting value Enter or select the data to be written by test operation 2 Command buttons Current value display Displays the current value of the item selected This is used to check the text that cannot be displayed in the current value field However in this utility package all items can be displayed in the display fields Make text file Creates a file containing the screen data
300. status of the target device is Connection not used to send data normal or not open The connection used to send COMERBR Check the line status for an data was already closed error Retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not COM ERR Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry this error after a little while The TCP connection was TCP disconnected forcibly from the connection target device forcibly This error may be ignored disconnected when no problems arise from Counter the problem in the following procedure Check whether or not the QJ71MT91 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit Check whether or not the operating environment of the System is within the range of general specifications of the 74801 CPU module The OS of the QJ71MT91 Check whether the power to System error COM ERR WE E detected error capacity is sufficient or not TSEDR Check the QJ71MT91 CPU module and base unit to see if the hardware is normal according to the manual of each module If the module is faulty please consult your local Mitsubishi representative If the problem cannot be resolved in the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 1 Refer to Section 11 3 1 for the error code storage areas 2 Refer to Chapter 7 for details of the parameter setting ranges etc
301. t parameter creation Parameter setting operation Automatic communication Not started Started function Master function tv 00000000000000000000000080007000000000 l Dedicated instution e ee Master function o seseeeckec eme memet teet eee ee ee i Luo Exception response Request message Slave function i Request message not acceptable no assignment parameters acceptable GX Developer not connectable GX Developer connectable Function execution GX Developer connection 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q MEMO 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 PARAMETER SETTING This chapter explains the settings of the parameters 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure 1 Parameter types To use the QJ71MT91 set the following parameters as necessary a Basic parameters Set the basic information necessary for the QJ71MT91 When using the preset initial values of the QJ71MT91 no setting is required Refer to Section 7 2 for details b Automatic communication parameters Set the automatic communication parameters when using the automatic communication function with the QJ71MT91 acting as the master Refer to Section 7 3 for details If the automatic communication function is not to be used setting of these parameters are not required c MODBUS device assignment parameters Set the MODBUS device assig
302. t slave port No 0 Sent to No 502 1 to 65535 1 to 65535 Sent to the set port No 3 Specify the time for monitoring a response from the target device slave 500ms MER Specify the ti itoring a resp get device slave M cone CE increments 0 monitoring timer User lus 0 60 30s 2 to 2400 valu 2 to 2400 Set value Response monitoring timer value set value X 500ms Specify the types of the read write target MODBUS devices b15 b8 b7 bO Read target Write target Target MODBUS device type Type specification of the target MODBUS device o EA T EA o EA o KA T EA T EA T E o E 10 3 10 3 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Setting Setting Device Item Set Data Range Side 9 Correspond Specify the file number when the target MODBUS device is the extended file 0 to DP U ser ing file number register Specify the head number of the read target MODBUS device As the device head number specify the lower 5 digits of actual device number 1 0 to 65535 With the exception of the file number and device number of the extended file 904 register Example Specify 31 when accessing the input 100032 Set the read points of the MODBUS device Use the following unit to set the access points Type specification of the target Settin Pee 4 i g Access points that can be set MODBUS device unit Coi 0 to 2000 Access points 01 Coi
303. t storage area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA turns ON also when the default parameters exist The MODBUS device assignment parameter setting is not allowed in the offline mode intelligent function module switch 1 00014 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters in the online mode intelligent function module switch 1 0000p f The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response to the master if it receives a 9 MODBUS device data read write request message from the master before the MODBUS device assignment parameters are set normally MODBUS device assignment parameter setting via a sequence program can be made again at any time after power up of the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 6 6 1 for details of whether each function can be executed or not depending on the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 System configuration A program will be explained as an example to realize the following specifications for the setting target QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 Setting target f QJ74MT91 MODBUS TCP master device 192 1 0 1 192 1 0 3 v v o ae um Aa a e Ethernet Y o n A A A QJ71MT
304. ta address Illegal data value failure Acknowledge Slave device 01H 02H 03H 044 05x 6H Slave busy 11 21 a Exception code storage location If the processing in the slave results in error completion the exception code can be confirmed in the error log area address CFEH to DFFx of the buffer memory b Exception code list The following is a list of exception codes used when the QJ71MT91 is a slave The slave QJ71MT91 received an unsupported function code The specified address of the MODBUS device is abnormal The contents of the data part of the request message are abnormal A fatal error occurred while the slave QJ71MT91 was attempting to perform the requested action and the processing was impossible As the slave is executing other processing a long duration of time is required for completion of the request message processing As the slave is executing other processing the request message processing cannot be executed Corrective Action QJ71MT91 Slave side Remove the error factor in the QJ71MT91 If the QU71MT91 issued this code confirm the error code stored in the error log area Refer to Section 11 3 1 8 and take corrective action Target device Master side Confirm the function code supported by QJ71MT91 and review the request message to be sent Confirm the MODBUS device type and size supported by QJ71MT91 and review the specified addres
305. tatus Automatic communication status Error log Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor 11 41 Being requested XZY Monitor test Basic MODBUS R device Automatic communication Error lo Details Monitoring Select input Setting range Not requested Being requested 11 41 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 4 Change the Current value field of the COM ERR LED OFF request back to Not requested Because the COM ERR LED OFF request current value does not return to Not requested automatically after turn off of the COM ERR LED it must be manually returned to Not requested after the COM ERR LED has turned off After confirming Not lit select Not requested in the COM ERR LED OFF request setting value field and click the Execute test button When the processing is completed a Completed message appears Monitor Test Module information Module type X MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71MT31 Setting item Current value Setting value LED ON status Lit INIT status OPEN status Not lit ERR status Not lit COM ERR LED OFF request Being requested Not requested pas MODPUSII device assignment parameter Basic MODBUSIR device Automatic communication status Automatic communication Error log Error lo Flash ROM setting Details Cu
306. the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 1 2 5 3 1 3 2 1 5 1 5 2 1 5 5 6 1 6 4 6 6 7 2 2 7 4 1 7 4 2 7 4 4 Chapter 8 Section 9 1 3 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 10 2 10 3 11 1 11 2 11 3 1 11 3 3 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 5 1 Section 2 4 May 2008 SH NA 080446ENG F Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Compliance with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 1 3 1 6 1 6 6 7 4 2 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 3 3 8 6 10 2 10 3 11 2 11 3 3 Appendix 3 Nov 2010 SH NA 080446ENG G Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 2 1 2 5 6 3 6 6 8 2 1 11 2 Appendix WARRANTY Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT The manual number is gen on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Oct 2014 SH NA 080446ENG H Modifications COMPLIANCE WITH THE EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES ABOUT THE GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS MEANINGS AND DEFINITIONS OF TERMS Chapter 1 Section 2 1 2 2 2 4 2 5 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 4 3 12 5 1 62 6 3 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 6 6 6 1 7 1 7 2 2 7 3 1 7 4 2 7 4 4 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 6 9 1 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 3 2 9 3 3 10 2 10 3 11 1 11 2 11 3 2 11 3 3 Appendix 1 Addition Appendix 2 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 3
307. the case where messages split on a TCP UDP level are received 2 Nosetting is required when the default value is used 1 Specify the QJ71MT91 side timer values that will satisfy the following conditions 1 Automatic Split reception TCP ULP TCP end TCP IP communication response gt monitoring gt timer gt timer gt resend reassembly monitoring timer value timer value value value timer value timer value 2 Response monitoring Split reception TCP ULP TCP end TCP IP e timer value for dedicated gt monitoring gt timer gt timer gt resend reassembly instruction timer value value value timer value timer value 1 Automatic communication response monitoring timer value is a response monitoring timer value for the automatic communication function Refer to Section 7 3 for details 2 Refer to Section 10 2 or 10 3 for details When making communication between two QJ71MT91s perform the same settings to both modules 2 Specify the target device side timer values that will satisfy the following conditions If the timer values are not as indicated below communication errors such as send time out may occur frequently Target device side TCP QJ71MT91 side TCP resend timer value resend timer value 2 Monitoring timer value on target CPU response QJ71MT91 side xi device side application software gt monitoring TCP ULP timer xn timer value value 1
308. the default parameters Intelligent function module switch setting lt Switch 2 gt b1 bO o c o3 c 9 nnan 0 0 MODBUS device assignment parameter Basic parameter starting method starting method 0 Start with the default parameters 0 Start with the default parameters Communication starting conditions Default parameter setting Basic parameters QJ71MT91 operation MODBUS device assignment parameters Module READY X0 Basic parameter setting request Y1 Basic parameter setting normally X1 r4 completed P Power 2 Basic parameter x3 H OFF S existence th i o en f e ON MODBUS device Pro 3 assignment parameter yg gram i 5 setting request mable 9 MODBUS device contor assignment parameter xg H ler CAE MES setting normally CPU completed reset MODBUS device assignment parameter XA setting existence Automatic communication Not started Started 5 function Master function Str rrr ttre D 3 Dedicated instruction t DN Not executable Executable 9 Master function e l C POL T SNR VERRE S Slave function iRequest message not acceptable Request message acceptable Me I nie u GX Developer connection 4 GX Developer not connectable GX Developer connectable 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCED
309. the default value is used c TCP resend timer value 1 Set the resend time for the case where ACK is not returned when TCP connection is opened and TCP data are transmitted This timer is also used for the time for resending an ARP request in the case where a response is not returned in reply to the sent ARP request ARP is resent at the TCP resend timer value 2 2 No setting is required when the default value is used d TCP end timer value 1 When TCP connection is closed from the local station the local station sends FIN to the target device and receives ACK and then FIN from the target device Set the monitoring time for which the station will wait for FIN from the target device 2 If FIN is not received from the target device when the TCP end timer is expired RST is sent to the target device forcing the connection to close 3 No setting is required when the default value is used e IP reassembly timer value 1 In data communications a block of data may be split into segments on an IP level due to the send receive station buffer limitations 2 Set the time for waiting for the next split data segment in the case where the QJ71MT91 receives and restores the split data 3 No setting is required when the initial value is used 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q f Split reception monitoring timer value 1 Setthe time from the receipt of the first message segment until the receipt of the last message segment in
310. the network cable specifications Confirm the specifications of the used Section 3 1 i network cable Check whether data has reached the target device Check the target device Check for errors Check whether the target device is ready for operation Check whether the target device is attempting to communicate with the QJ71MT91 Conduct a PING test to check the target device status and line status If the data has not reached the target device check the route and line status Section 7 2 and take corrective action if necessary Section 11 5 When data is sent via a router check the routing information settings of the QJ71MT91 and target device Take corrective action if the target device has any problem Check the line status Correct the line status if it has any problem in traffic Check for any TCP connection disconnected automatically by the KeepAlive function When the QJ71MT91 is the master check if the communication target device is a MODBUS TCP slave device When the QJ71MT91 is a slave check if the communication target device is a MODBUS TCP master device Check if the number of TCP connections Retry as TCP connections may fail connected simultaneously is within 64 Check that the target device is Section 5 4 Section 7 2 operating normally Adjust the KeepAlive start timer value and KeepAlive interval timer value Set a MODBUS TCP slave device as the commun
311. the request write points in the request message is stored message is stored H L H L 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 8FH code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 8 Write multiple registers FC 16 Writes values to multiple holding registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 123 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head holding Write points Number Device data sre Device data 104 register number n 1 of bytes 00004 to FFFF 00014 to 007Bx nx2 1 00014 to OOF 6x Te Number of bytes nx2 gt 1 The number of points specified as the write points must be matched with the number of bytes 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Head holding register number Write points 104 The value same as in the The value same as in the request message is stored request message is stored Function code Exception 90H code 2 2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Sect
312. the target devices that must keep the TCP connections open 5 Up to 64 preferred nodes can be specified b Preferred node specification IP address 1 Setthe IP address of the target device to be specified for the preferred node 2 Setthe value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 c Preferred node specification TCP connection 1 Specify the number of TCP connections used for communication with the specified preferred nodes 2 Setthe value that satisfies the following condition Preferred node specification 1 TCP connection preferred node specification 64 TCP connection number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection S 64 It is not necessary to use the preferred node specification when the total number of TCP connections used by the QJ71MT91 is not more than 64 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 3 Automatic Communication Parameters 7 3 1 Automatic communication parameters details Default Address Parameter Name Setting Range Value 0200H to Refer to 1 in this section 0201H Target station IP address 00000000H me communication 00000000H 512 to 513 parameter not set 0 to 255 Target device 1 MODBUS Serial Module ID 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 MODBUS Serial device station No 2 MODBUS TCP 255 Repeat interval timer value 0 to 65535 Set time set value x 10ms 0 2 t
313. ther station is not available either Tests the RAM and ROM of the QJ71MT91 000DH Hardware test Refer to Section 6 5 1 Checks the hardware including the send receive circuits of OOOEH Self loopback test i the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 6 5 2 A switch 1 error error code 73014 will occur if the set value is other than the value indicated in the table If the switch error has occurred correct the switch setting and then switch the power OFF and ON or reset the programmable controller CPU 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 2 Communication condition setting Switch 2 Specify the starting methods the send frame and the online change enable disable setting lt Switch 2 gt b15 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Specify 0 1 f 7 E Send frame specification Basic parameter starting method 0 Data are sent in the Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame 1 Data are sent in the IEEE802 3 compliant frame 0 Start with the default parameters 1 Start with the user set parameters 2 Online change enable disable setting MODBUS device assignment ter starti thod 0 Online change disabled parameier staring meho 1 Online change enabled 0 Start with the default parameters fu 1 Start with the user set parameters 2 1 The information in this area is ignored However if the setting in this area is other than 0 a switch 2 error error code 7302u occurs If the switc
314. ting success count D10003 For getting failure count U0 G4064 Communication time check UOG4065 U0 G4066 to IP address Intelligent function module U0 G4067 device 11 50 11 50 11 TROUBLESHOOTING c Program example Data setting for PING test MELSEC Q PING test execution result Move WovP 11 51 ove G4068 UO G4069 UO G4070 uoy G4071 request D10000 010001 010002 010003 X20 X0 X3 UON 1 ww K2 64064 Communication time check 1s PING test Module Basic execution READY parameter command setting existence UO H VP K4 64066 Transmission count 4 times UO DMOVP H0C0010001 64066 IP address 192 1 0 1 yic PING test execution request ON PING test execution request X1C RST yic PING test execution request OFF PING test PING test completed execution Execution result Total packet transmission count J Success count Failure count 11 51 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDICES Appendix 1 External Dimensions an QJ71MT91 T RUN RR INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M E APP eo 9 oo O 10BASE T 100BASE TX Y QJ71MT91 My i HL T Is 23 0 91 90 3 54 E 27 4 1 08 0 16 Unit mm in 1 Depending on the serial number the connector
315. tion Issues a MODBUS device read write request message to MBRW Section 10 2 the slave Communicates with the slave in the request message i MBREQ Section 10 3 format of any PDU protocol data unit FUNCTION crus MELSEC Q 5 3 Slave Function This section explains the functions of the QJ71MT91 as a slave of MODBUS TCP 5 3 1 Automatic response function The automatic response function allows the QJ71MT91 slave function to automatically execute the processing requested by the function code of a request message from the master and return a response message to the master The automatic response function uses the MODBUS device assignment function Refer to Section 5 3 2 for the MODBUS device assignment function Refer to Section 4 1 for the function codes supported by the slave function of the QJ71MT91 Programmable QJ71MT91 controller CPU Slave function MopBUsS rcP master device KNEES 1 iS 1 Receipt of ene Request message function code unnecessary poe 2 liii Identification of function code 3 Execution of i corresponding id 4 Sending of response Response message message Ethernet 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 3 2 MODBUS device assignment function 1 MODBUS device assignment function a b c The MODBUS device assignment function automatically converts access to a slave QJ71MT91 MODBUS
316. tion 1 Number of connections Transfers basic parameters to QJ71MT91 buffer memory Turns ON Basic parameter setting request Y1001 when ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error Turns OFF Basic parameter setting request Y1001 when setting is completed normally Turns ON Automatic communication parameter setting command M100 Turns OFF Basic parameter setting request Y1001 and stores error code into D3088 when setting fails Handling of ZP REMFR instruction error 9 PROGRAMMING lt lt Automatic communication parameter setting gt gt M100 X1000 X1003 FMOVP HO D512 moo Parameter Module Basic setting READY parameter comm command setting existence status Automatic communication 7777777777777757 parameter 1 lt Read coils gt I DMovP HOCO010002 D512 wove K255 D J 1 wovP K1200 D515 r MOVP K60 D516 7 i WP H100 Di i 1 MOVP H1100 D518 1 Read setting T MOVP K15000 D518 7 ee wove _Kioz4 0520 J Automatic communication 4 parameter 2 I ovp HOC0010002 D524 71 lt Write holding registers gt MOVP K255 D526 7 WP k10 D 27 i WOP K60 po J 1 i MWP I5 0529 7 1 MOVP H3A00 D533 Y 1 Write setting i MOVE KO D534 i MOVP K100 D535 RST M100 Parameter setting
317. tion type Dedicated Module Basic instruction READY parameter start setting command existence ov Ho 1 Clears the complete condition to O I jn HO 2 Sets 0 fixed vov 00010002 3 Target IP address WV K255 5 Module ID Station No vov Ho 6 Target slave port No vov K100 7 Response monitoring timer value vov K7 00 Request message size MOV HI6 01 7 Mv H2 02 Request message HOV Ho 03 7 voy H8 04 IL WREG Uo Do D100 D300 NO Dedicated instruction Z MBREQ MBREQ instruction completed MO MI D301 7 r 1 1 ME M Processing for normal completion normal response m MBREQ MBREQ EXCODUOR Oe SS esed PEE instruction instruction bit completed result D301 7 dmm xix nizim cimi uimic ee SS 1 Processing for normal completion exception response 4 Exception bit M1 r 1 1 Processing for error completion m MBREQ instruction result END 7 10 18 10 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q This chapter explains the error details and corrective actions 11 1 Troubleshooting RUN LED turned off 2 ERR LED turned 3 COM ERR LED 11 1 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by LEDs Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Check the mounting status of the Switch the power off and remount the Section 6 1 QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 Check the power supply capacity Change the power supply module Section 3 1 Check the programmable co
318. to use the default parameters a Basic parameters Execute Basic parameter setting request Y1001 after writing the basic parameters to the buffer memory by the REMOTO instruction For a program example for basic parameter setting refer to Basic parameter setting in 6 b in this section b Automatic communication parameters Execute Automatic communication parameter setting request Y1004 after writing the automatic communication parameters to the buffer memory by the REMOTO instruction For a program example for automatic communication parameter setting refer to Automatic communication parameter setting in 6 b in this section c MODBUS device assignment parameters Execute MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y1008 after writing the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the buffer memory by the REMOTO instruction For a program example for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting refer to MODBUS device assignment parameter setting in 6 b in this section 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Network parameter setting Set the network parameters on Network parameter of GX Developer 1 Network type MNET H remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000x 3 Network No 1 4 Total number of slave stations 1 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting M station gt Ri station Station No GEN em Au E entere a UR IRURE ee S ein oni Dev name Points
319. truction For instruction completion M61 MO setting Basic parameter setting command REMFR instruction For instruction result M100 Automatic communication parameter setting command F t ti M101 PS co S REMTO instruction For instruction completion communication 7 M102 REMTO instruction For instruction result parameter setting M111 REMFR instruction For instruction completion M112 REMFR instruction For instruction result Internal relay A 7 M200 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting command i M201 FORMES device REMTO instruction For instruction completion assignment parameter M202 REMTO instruction For instruction result setting REMFR instruction For instruction completion REMFR instruction For instruction result REMFR instruction For instruction completion REMFR instruction For instruction result REMTO instruction For instruction completion REMTO instruction For instruction result For automatic t M320 Pn REMFR instruction For instruction completion communication function M321 REMFR instruction For instruction result M322 M330 REMFR instruction For instruction completion M331 M401 Automatic For automatic communication parameter 1 M402 communication normal For automatic communication parameter 2 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 3 2 Program using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switch
320. tting of the number of routers set in the basic parameter is incorrect The KeepAlive related setting in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the local slave station port No in the basic parameter is incorrect COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR setting Review the setting of the preferred node specification Review the setting of the subnet mask pattern Review the setting of the default router IP address Review the setting of the subnet address Review the setting of the router IP address Review the setting of the number of routers set Review the KeepAlive related setting Review the setting of the number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection Review the setting of the local slave station port No Continued on next page 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Number of TCP connections setting error Timer setting magnitude relationship error Port No setting error for automatic communication function Target slave port No setting error for automatic communication function System area setting error CPU response monitoring timer setting error Basic parameter setting failure Port No setting error for dedicated instruction Dedicated instruction interruption Device code error 11 25 The numb
321. tup GX Developer m BEHIHEHEHSESBERHEHHHEHEHRHHRHEHHREREHRRERHHENEH Ethernet 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING This chapter explains the procedures and setting method for operating the QJ71MT91 in a system 1 For use of the QJ71MT91 read the safety precautions provided in the first pages of this manual 2 The mounting and installation environment of the QJ71MT91 are the same as those of the programmable controller CPU For details refer to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 6 1 Handling Precautions This section explains the precautions for handling the QJ71MT91 1 Since the case of the QJ71MT91 is made of resin do not drop or give it hard impact 2 Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module 3 Tighten the screws such as module fixing screws within the following ranges Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw i 0 36 to 0 48N m normally not required M3 screw 1 1 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration 6
322. tus X6 does not turn on 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X signals Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Refer to RUN LED turned off Refer to the basic parameter error code storage area 0C10u and confirm the error code Check if basic parameter setting has been completed Refer to the basic parameter error code storage area 0C104u and confirm the error code Refer to the automatic communication parameter error code storage area 0C114H and confirm the error code and refer to the automatic communication parameter setting result storage area 0C12u and identify the parameter number where the error occurred Confirm the error code in the MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area Check if the automatic communication function is active Check if the automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 is on Check if the INIT LED is on Check if the basic parameter setting error completed X2 is on This section 1 1 Take the corresponding corrective action and retry Section 7 2 Section 11 3 Set the basic parameters from GX Configurator MB or from the sequence program Section 7 2 Section 9 1 1 In the setting of intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting b0 Basic parameter starting method select OFF Start with the default parameters Sectio
323. tus indication device D2 1 turns ON and the error code is stored into the complete condition S1 1 When the processing in the slave is completed with an error the exception code is stored into S1 2 According to the error code and exception code check the error and take corrective action referring to the following manual Error code 03E8H to 4FFFH QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7300H or more Section 11 3 3 in this manual Exception code Section 11 3 2 in this manual 2 If Basic parameter setting request Y1 turns ON during execution of the MBRW instruction the dedicated instruction is completed with an error 10 7 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following program is designed to read and write the device data in the holding register of the slave IP address 192 1 0 2 When the I O signals of the QJ71MT91 are X YOO to X Y1F MODBUSS TCP QJ71MT91 slave device Master 192 1 0 2 5 00 Day Ethernet QJ71MT91 MODBUSS TCP Master slave device Device memory MODBUSS device 400500 D400 32 points 4 100 points 6 400531 411000 A n S Nd 100 points W0000 i 4 32 points WO001F 411099 10 8 10 8 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS DO MO MBRW instructi
324. ud Al ae te Ale eat 6 5 gp 6 5 OPEN isevadfsiteted Sided hie 6 5 ID isncssatusaealtenaieealtes agente 6 5 RUN aM DD RU 6 5 Index 2 M SD tine Sei tau efe ee ee ees 6 5 Local slave station port No 7 17 Master function sssssssssesssss 5 1 Master function performance App 2 Max number of modules 2 1 Maximum node to node distance 3 2 Maximum number of connections 3 2 Maximum number of parameter settings 8 3 Maximum segment length 3 2 MODBUS device MODBUS device assignment function 5 11 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area 11 16 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area 11 16 MODBUS device assignment parameter Starting method sssssss 6 13 MODBUS device assignment parameters Ue EET EDEN 7 23 MODBUS device assignment parameters details etes 7 26 MODBUS device sizes 7 25 MODBUS R device assignment parameter SC6el ia tee teen aa tesa een 8 35 MODBUS device assignment parameter Settllig iioi sib eiae ties 9 7 I O signals for setting 9 7 Setting method sssesssss 9 7 Setting precautions sssss 9 10 Timing charts
325. unction code Function code Head holding register number Read points 034 00004 to FFFFu 00014 to 007Du 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data iy Device data 034 read bytes 1 nx2 1 m ab Number of read bytes nx 2 gt 1 For example when n 4 the number of read bytes is 4 x 2 8 bytes When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 83H code x2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 4 Read input registers FC 04 Reads the values of one or more input registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 125 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head input register number Read points 044 00004 to FFFFu 00014 to 007Du 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data DU Device data 044 read bytes 1 nx2 1 mL Number of read bytes nx2 gt 1 For example when n 4 the number of read bytes is 4 x 2 8 bytes When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 84H code
326. unction module switch 2 set the MODBUS device assignment Use the default parameters 2 parameter starting method bit 1 to 0 Start MODBUS device assignment i with the default parameters Refer to 1 in parameters this section Do not use the MODBUS device assignment function slave function 1 To utilize the basic parameters with the initial values refer to Section 7 2 1 it is recommended to use the default parameters 2 When the device assignment of the CPU is not changed it is recommended to use the default parameters a Basic parameters For a program example of the basic parameters refer to Basic parameter setting in 5 b Automatic communication parameters For a program example of the automatic communication parameters refer to Automatic communication parameter setting in 5 c MODBUS device assignment parameters For a program example of the MODBUS device assignment parameters refer to MODBUS device assignment parameter setting in 5 3 Auto refresh setting For the processing equivalent to the auto refresh setting GX Configurator MB refer to Refresh processing in 5 4 Automatic communication function a For a program example for normal automatic communication refer to Processing for normal automatic communication in 5 b For a program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to Handling of
327. unication parameters Refer to Section 8 7 2 9 2 9 3 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 8 7 3 9 2 9 3 Is the QJ71MT91 mounted on the main base unit where the Redundant CPU is mounted NO Set the redundant setting Switch 5 Refer to Section 6 6 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 1 Write the parameters to the programmable controller CPU With the RUN STOP switch set to RUN reset the programmable controller CPU Is ERR LED OFF Ng lt Intelligent function module switch setting error gt Check the error code in the system monitor of GX Developer and take action Refer to Section 11 3 3 Is COM ERR LED OFF Is X3 Basic parameter setting NO existence ON 1 i lt Basic parameter error gt Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 NO Will the automatic 1 communication function be used Is X6 Automatic communication NO operation status i ON 1 mA Automatic communication parameter error Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 1 MODBUSS device NO assignment parameter setting existence ON i lt MODBUS device assignment parameter error Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Parameter setting completion 1 1 The X signal status can be c
328. vator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date x Manual Number Revision Jan 2004 SH NA 080446ENG A First Edition Mar 2004 SH NA 080446ENG B Modifications Section 7 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 8 6 8 7 9 2 2 11 1 11 4 11 5 Nov 2005 SH NA 080446ENG C Modifications Section 4 3 10 5 2 1 6 1 6 2 6 6 7 1 7 3 1 7 4 1 to 7 4 5 8 22 8 3 1 8 3 3 8 7 2 9 1 10 2 10 3 11 1 11 2 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 4 Feb 2006 SH NA 080446ENG D Modifications Section 2 1 2 4 10 1 Jan 2008 SH NA 080446ENG E Modifications SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Conformation to
329. ved response message does not match the request message FC 15 FC 16 FC 21 The automatic communication stop request Y6 was made with the automatic communication function stopped The automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 was made with the automatic communication function ON The response monitoring timer timed out in the automatic communication function The response monitoring timer timed out in the dedicated instruction COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not When the automatic communication function is stopped do not make the automatic communication stop request Y6 After stopping the automatic communication function make the automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 Conduct a PING test etc to check whether the target device exists or not If an error has occurred in the target device remove the error Set a larger response monitoring timer value MELSEC Q Lt 2 3 4 5 Continued on next page 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q d Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action ipti i iv i Code ME Since the basic parameters have not yet been set the dedicated instruction cannot be
330. will be used or not Setting name Setting Not used KeepAlive function is not used Used KeepAlive function is used 2 Nosetting is required when the default value is used b KeepAlive start timer value 1 Setthe time interval from the stop of communication with the target device to the start of alive check for the TCP connection opened with KeepAlive valid 2 Nosetting is required when the default value is used c KeepAlive interval timer value 1 Setthe alive recheck interval time for the case that no response from the target device can be received through the TCP connection opened with KeepAlive valid 2 Nosetting is required when the default value is used d KeepAlive resend count 1 Sethow many times the KeepAlive check message will be resent to the target device when no response can be received through the TCP connection opened with KeepAlive valid 2 Nosetting is required when the default value is used 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 3 Routing information a Router relay function 1 Set whether the router relay function will be used or not The router relay function is not needed when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on the same Ethernet the subnet address of the IP address is the same 2 The router relay function allows communication with devices on other Ethernets via routers and gateways The router relay function does not mean a function with which the QJ71MT91 acts as a
331. y in the cell 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB MELSEC Q 2 Data created with the utility package The following data or files that are created with the utility package can be also handled in GX Developer Figure 8 1 shows respective data or files are handled in which operation lt Intelligent function module parameter gt a Initial settings and auto refresh settings are saved in an intelligent function module parameter file in a project created with GX Developer Project Program Parameter PLC parameter Network parameter Intelligent function module parameter Steps 1 to 3 shown in Figure 8 1 are performed as follows 1 From GX Developer select Project Open project Save Save as 2 Onthe intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Intelligent function module parameter Open parameters Save parameters 3 From GX Developer select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC Intelligent function module parameter Alternatively from the intelligent function module selection screen of the utility select Online Read from PLC Write to PLC 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB lt Text files gt A text file can be created by clicking the Make text file setting Auto refresh setting or Monitor Test screen The text files can be utilized to create user documents GX Developer GX Configurator MB Progra
332. ystem area uw E A v A System switching when Disconnection communication error occurs IP mode type with GX Developer 3 0 Disable 0 Fixed IP mode 0 to 60 1 Enable 1 Redundant IP mode System switching when System switching at communication error occurs disconnection detection 0 Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Enable 1 A mode for which IP addresses are fixed to system A and system B 2 A mode for which IP addresses are switched according to a system switching of the control system and standby system 3 The value 0s to 30s obtained by multiplying the setting value 0 to 60 by 500ms will be a timeout occurrence time at disconnection detection If a value of 61 or more is set the switch 5 error 73051 will occur 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 6 1 Communication starting conditions depending on basic parameter MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method setting The communication starting conditions change depending on the combination of the basic parameter and MODBUS device assignment parameter starting methods in Switch 2 of the intelligent function module switch setting 1 When GX Configurator MB is used for parameter setting When GX Configurator MB is used to make parameter setting set the basic parameter and MODBUS device assignment parameter starting methods to

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ダスト・ボックス  取扱説明書  Les arts et la culture  User Manual  QUADRI AUTOMATICI DI RIFASAMENTO tipo G3E  Garmin R44 Instruction Manual  DM1260Q  Compact DECT Installation Manual  CHAPES ET LIANTS  【オビ 取扱説明書】(PDF:1.62MB)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file